1756 Rm084 en PImport Export

Reference Manual
Logix5000 Controllers Import/Export

1756 ControlLogix, 1756 GuardLogix, 1768 CompactLogix, 1768 Compact GuardLogix, 1769
CompactLogix, 1789 SoftLogix5600, PowerFlex 700S with DriveLogix
Important user information

Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment
before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions
in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by
suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice. If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer,
the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this
equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated
with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and
diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this
manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic
loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence
Important:
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be
present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous
temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc Flash. Arc
Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work
practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Summary of changes
This manual contains new and updated information. This table contains the
changes made to this revision.
Change
Topic
Added Equipment Sequence functionality.
Define an Equipment Sequence routine on page 221
Added the Primary Action Set controller security

attribute.
L5X controller structure on page 51, L5K CONTROLLER structure on

page 52
Added the Permission Set controller attribute.
Controller attributes on page 54
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015
Table of contents
Preface
Studio 5000 environment ..................................................................................... 19

Supported controllers ............................................................................................ 19
Additional resources............................................................................................... 21
Legal Notices............................................................................................................ 21
Chapter 1
Import and export files
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 23
Export a Project to an .L5K Text File ................................................................ 23
Import an .L5K text file......................................................................................... 24
Export a Project to an .L5X XML File............................................................... 26
Import an .L5X XML File .................................................................................... 27
Export to a .CSV or .TXT file.............................................................................. 28
Import a .CSV or .TXT file .................................................................................. 30
Export source-protected logic .............................................................................. 33
Export in a Cleartext Format ........................................................................ 33
Maintaining controller access............................................................................... 36
.L5X file structure ................................................................................................... 37
.L5X file conventions ............................................................................................. 40
Internal file comments ................................................................................... 40
Component Descriptions .............................................................................. 40
Boolean attribute values ................................................................................. 41
Data display style ............................................................................................. 41
Data formats ..................................................................................................... 41
.L5K file structure ................................................................................................... 46
.L5K file conventions ............................................................................................. 47
Internal file comments ................................................................................... 47
Component descriptions ............................................................................... 48
Display style ...................................................................................................... 48
Project documentation .......................................................................................... 49
Chapter 2
Define a controller
component
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 51
Controller component .......................................................................................... 51
L5X controller structure ................................................................................ 51
L5K CONTROLLER structure .................................................................. 52
Controller elements ........................................................................................ 53
Controller attributes ....................................................................................... 54
Controller attributes in a safety controller system .......................................... 56
Table of contents
Controller guidelines ............................................................................................. 56

Examples ................................................................................................................... 57
Chapter 3
Define a Datatype
component
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 65
Datatype component ............................................................................................. 65
L5X datatype structure .................................................................................. 65
L5K datatype structure................................................................................... 65
Datatype elements ........................................................................................... 65
Datatype attributes.......................................................................................... 66
Datatype member ................................................................................................... 66
L5X datatype member structure .................................................................. 66
L5K datatype member structure .................................................................. 67
Datatype member elements ........................................................................... 67
Datatype member attributes ......................................................................... 67
Bit members ...................................................................................................... 68
Datatype guidelines ................................................................................................ 69
Examples ................................................................................................................... 70
Chapter 4
Define a module component
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 71
Module component ................................................................................................ 71
L5X module structure .................................................................................... 71
L5K MODULE structure ............................................................................. 71
Module elements ............................................................................................. 72
Module attributes ............................................................................................ 72
Module attributes in a safety controller system................................................ 75
Module connection ................................................................................................ 76
L5X connection structure ............................................................................. 76
L5K CONNECTION structure ................................................................. 76
Connection elements...................................................................................... 77
Module connection attributes ...................................................................... 77
Module connection attributes in a safety controller system .................. 78
Module guidelines................................................................................................... 79
Examples ................................................................................................................... 79
Table of contents
Chapter 5
Define an Add-On Instruction
component
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 87
Add-On Instruction component ........................................................................ 87
L5X AddOnInstructionDefinition Structure .......................................... 87
L5K ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION structure........... 88
Add-On Instruction elements ...................................................................... 88
Add-On Instruction attributes..................................................................... 88
Routines in Add-On Instructions ............................................................... 89
Parameters ................................................................................................................ 90
L5X parameters structure .............................................................................. 90
L5K parameters structure .............................................................................. 91
Parameter elements ......................................................................................... 92
Parameters attributes ...................................................................................... 93
Signature history ..................................................................................................... 94
L5X SignatureHistory structure .................................................................. 95
L5K HISTORY_ENTRY structure ........................................................... 95
History entry attributes.................................................................................. 95
Local tags................................................................................................................... 95
L5X LocalTags structure ............................................................................... 95
L5K LOCAL_TAGS structure ................................................................... 96
Local tag attributes .......................................................................................... 96
Encoded/Unencoded Add-On Instructions .................................................... 97
L5X EncodedData Structure ........................................................................ 97
L5K ENCODED_DATA Structure .......................................................... 97
Encoded data attributes ................................................................................. 98
L5X Encoded Add-On Instruction example............................................. 99
L5K Encoded Add-On instruction example ........................................... 100
Add-On Instruction Guidelines ........................................................................ 100
L5X unencoded AddOnInstruction definition example ..................... 101
Add-On Instruction Example, Continued .............................................. 102
L5K unencoded ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION _DEFINITION
example ............................................................................................................ 102
L5X unencoded safety AddOnInstruction definition example .......... 105
L5K unencoded safety ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION _DEFINITION
example ............................................................................................................ 105
Chapter 6
Define a tag component
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 107

Tag component ..................................................................................................... 107
L5X tag structure ........................................................................................... 107
Table of contents
L5K TAG structure ...................................................................................... 108

Tag elements ................................................................................................... 108
Tag attributes ................................................................................................. 110
Produced tag attributes ................................................................................ 112
Consumed tag attributes.............................................................................. 112
ALARM_ANALOG tag..................................................................................... 113
L5X tag structure for ALARM_ANALOG tag ..................................... 113
L5K tag structure for ALARM_ANALOG tag ..................................... 113
ALARM_ANALOG tag attributes .......................................................... 113
ALARM_DIGITAL tag ..................................................................................... 115
L5X tag structure for ALARM_DIGITAL tag ...................................... 115
L5K tag structure for an ALARM_DIGITAL tag ................................ 116
ALARM_DIGITAL tag attributes ........................................................... 116
L5X AlarmConfig structure ............................................................................... 117
AlarmConfig elements ................................................................................. 118
L5K ANALOG_ALARM message structure ......................................... 118
ALMMSG elements...................................................................................... 118
MESSAGE tag ....................................................................................................... 119
L5X message structure.................................................................................. 119
L5K MESSAGE structure ........................................................................... 119
Message tag attributes ................................................................................... 119
AXIS_CIP_DRIVE, AXIS_CONSUMED, AXIS_GENERIC_DRIVE,
AXIS_SERVO, AXIS_SERVO_DRIVE, or AXIS_VIRTUAL Tag ...... 120
L5X axis structure ......................................................................................... 120
L5K AXIS TAG structure........................................................................... 120
Axis tag attributes .......................................................................................... 120
COORDINATE_SYSTEM tag ....................................................................... 128
L5X CoordinateSystem structure.............................................................. 128
L5K COORDINATE_SYSTEM structure ........................................... 128
Coordinate system tag attributes ............................................................... 128
MOTION_GROUP Tag ................................................................................... 129
L5X MotionGroup structure ..................................................................... 129
L5K MOTION_GROUP structure ........................................................ 130
Motion Group Tag attributes..................................................................... 130
HMIBC tag ............................................................................................................ 130
L5X HMIBC structure ................................................................................ 130
L5K HMIBC structure ................................................................................ 130
HMIBC attributes ........................................................................................ 131
SAFETY tag ........................................................................................................... 131
L5X safety structure ...................................................................................... 131
L5K SAFETY structure ............................................................................... 131
Safety tag attributes ....................................................................................... 131
8
Table of contents
Tag initial values.................................................................................................... 132

L5X initial tag value ...................................................................................... 132
L5K initial TAG value ................................................................................. 133
Add-On Instruction tag values ................................................................... 133
Add-On Instruction tag values example ................................................... 134
Tag guidelines ........................................................................................................ 134
Examples ................................................................................................................. 135
Chapter 7
Define a program component
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 141

Program component ............................................................................................ 141
L5X program structure ................................................................................ 141
L5K PROGRAM structure......................................................................... 142
Program elements .......................................................................................... 142
Program attributes......................................................................................... 143
Program attributes for EquipmentPhase programs ............................... 143
Program attributes for Sequence programs.............................................. 144
Child program component ................................................................................. 145
L5K CHILD_PROGRAM structure....................................................... 145
L5X child program structure ...................................................................... 145
Child program attributes ............................................................................. 146
Child program guidelines ............................................................................ 146
Encoded/Unencoded routines .......................................................................... 146
L5X EncodedData Structure ...................................................................... 146
L5K ENCODED_DATA Structure ........................................................ 147
Encoded Data Elements ............................................................................... 147
L5K source protected routine example..................................................... 147
L5X source-protected routine examples................................................... 147
Program guidelines ............................................................................................... 148
Examples ................................................................................................................. 148
Chapter 8
Define a ladder logic routine
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 151

Ladder logic routine ............................................................................................. 151
L5X ladder logic routine structure ............................................................ 151
L5K Ladder Logic ROUTINE structure ................................................. 151
Ladder logic routine elements..................................................................... 151
RLL Routine attributes ................................................................................ 152
Rung logic ............................................................................................................... 152
L5X rung structure........................................................................................ 152
Table of contents
L5K RUNG structure .................................................................................. 152

Rung elements ................................................................................................ 152
Rung attributes............................................................................................... 153
Rung guidelines ..................................................................................................... 153
Branches .................................................................................................................. 153
L5X branch structure ................................................................................... 153
L5K BRANCH structure ............................................................................ 154
L5X Examples........................................................................................................ 154
L5K examples......................................................................................................... 154
Neutral text for ladder instructions .................................................................. 155
Chapter 9
Define a function block
diagram routine
10
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 163

Function BlockDiagram Routine...................................................................... 163
L5X function block diagram routine structure....................................... 163
L5K Function Block FBD_ROUTINE structure ................................. 163
Function block routine elements ............................................................... 163
FBD_routine attributes ............................................................................... 164
Sheet......................................................................................................................... 164
L5X sheet structure ....................................................................................... 164
L5K SHEET structure ................................................................................. 165
Sheet elements ................................................................................................ 165
Sheet attributes .............................................................................................. 166
Sheet guidelines .............................................................................................. 166
Export function block logic while editing online .......................................... 167
Input and output references ............................................................................... 168
L5X IREFand OREF structure .................................................................. 168
L5K IREF and OREF structure ................................................................. 168
Reference attributes ...................................................................................... 168
Reference guidelines ...................................................................................... 169
Input and output connectors ............................................................................. 169
L5X ICON and OCON structure ............................................................ 169
L5K ICON and OCON structure ............................................................ 169
Connector attributes .................................................................................... 169
Connector guidelines.................................................................................... 170
Blocks ...................................................................................................................... 170
L5X block structure ...................................................................................... 170
L5K BLOCK structure ................................................................................ 170
Block attributes .............................................................................................. 170
Block guidelines ............................................................................................. 171
Add-On instructions............................................................................................ 171
Table of contents
L5X Add-On Instruction structure .......................................................... 171

L5K ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION structure ....................................... 172
Add-On Instruction Attributes ................................................................. 172
Add-On Instruction Guidelines ................................................................ 172
JSR ............................................................................................................................ 173
L5X JSR structure ......................................................................................... 173
L5K JSR structure ......................................................................................... 173
JSR attributes.................................................................................................. 173
JSR guidelines ................................................................................................. 173
SBR .......................................................................................................................... 174
L5X SBR structure ........................................................................................ 174
L5K SBR structure ........................................................................................ 174
SBR attributes ................................................................................................ 174
SBR guidelines................................................................................................ 174
RET.......................................................................................................................... 174
L5X RET structure ....................................................................................... 174
L5K RET structure ....................................................................................... 174
RET attributes................................................................................................ 175
RET guidelines ............................................................................................... 175
Wires and feedback wires .................................................................................... 175
L5X wire structure ........................................................................................ 175
L5K WIRE structure .................................................................................... 175
Wire attributes ............................................................................................... 176
Wire guidelines .............................................................................................. 176
Text boxes............................................................................................................... 176
L5X TextBox structure ................................................................................ 176
L5K TEXTBOX structure.......................................................................... 176
Text box attributes ........................................................................................ 177
Text box guidelines ....................................................................................... 177
Attachments........................................................................................................... 177
L5X attachment structure ........................................................................... 177
L5K ATTACHMENT structure.............................................................. 177
Attachment attributes .................................................................................. 177
Attachment guidelines ................................................................................. 178
Examples ................................................................................................................. 179
Parameters for function block instructions .................................................... 181
Chapter 10
Define a sequential function
chart routine
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 187

Sequential function chart routine ..................................................................... 187
L5X sequential function chart structure .................................................. 187
11
Table of contents
L5K sequential function chart SFC_ROUTINE structure ................ 187

Sequential function chart elements ........................................................... 188
SFC_Routine attributes ............................................................................... 188
Export sequential function chart logic while editing online ....................... 189
Steps ......................................................................................................................... 190
L5X step structure ......................................................................................... 191
L5K STEP structure ..................................................................................... 191
Step elements .................................................................................................. 191
Step attributes ................................................................................................ 191
Preset ....................................................................................................................... 192
L5X preset structure ..................................................................................... 192
L5K PRESET structure................................................................................ 192
Limit high ............................................................................................................... 193
L5X limit high structure .............................................................................. 193
L5K LIMITHIGH structure...................................................................... 193
Limit low................................................................................................................. 193
L5X limit low structure................................................................................ 193
L5K LIMITHIGH structure...................................................................... 193
Action list ............................................................................................................... 194
L5X Action Structure................................................................................... 194
L5K ACTION structure ............................................................................. 194
Action attributes ............................................................................................ 194
Transitions ............................................................................................................. 195
L5X transition structure .............................................................................. 195
L5K TRANSITION structure .................................................................. 195
Transition elements ...................................................................................... 195
Transition attributes ..................................................................................... 195
Condition ............................................................................................................... 196
L5X condition structure .............................................................................. 196
L5K CONDITION structure ................................................................... 196
Subroutine calls ..................................................................................................... 196
L5X SbrRet structure ................................................................................... 196
L5K SBR_RET structure............................................................................. 196
Subroutine attributes .................................................................................... 197
Stops ........................................................................................................................ 197
L5X stop structure ........................................................................................ 197
L5K STOP structure .................................................................................... 197
Stop attributes ................................................................................................ 197
Branches .................................................................................................................. 198
Branch attributes ........................................................................................... 198
12
Table of contents
Leg attributes .................................................................................................. 198

Directed links......................................................................................................... 199
L5X DirectedLink structure ....................................................................... 199
L5K DIRECTED_LINK structure .......................................................... 199
Directed link attributes ................................................................................ 199
Directed link guidelines ............................................................................... 199
Text boxes............................................................................................................... 199
L5X TextBox structure ................................................................................ 199
L5K TEXTBOX structure.......................................................................... 200
Text box attributes ........................................................................................ 200
Text box guidelines ....................................................................................... 200
Attachments........................................................................................................... 200
Examples ................................................................................................................. 201
Chapter 11
Define a structured text
routine
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 209

Structured text routine ........................................................................................ 209
L5X structured text structure ..................................................................... 209
L5K structured text ST_ROUTINE structure ...................................... 209
Structured TextRoutine Elements ............................................................ 209
ST_Routine attributes ................................................................................. 210
Structured text logic ............................................................................................. 210
Export structured text logic while editing online .......................................... 211
Examples ................................................................................................................. 212
Structured text ....................................................................................................... 213
Chapter 12
Define an Equipment
Sequence routine
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 221

Equipment Sequence Routine ........................................................................... 221
L5X Equipment Sequence structure ......................................................... 221
L5K Equipment Sequence ESQ_ROUTINE structure ....................... 222
Equipment Sequence elements ................................................................... 222
ESQ_Routine attributes .............................................................................. 223
Steps ......................................................................................................................... 223
L5X step structure ......................................................................................... 223
L5K STEP structure ..................................................................................... 223
13
Table of contents
Step attributes ................................................................................................ 223

Transitions ............................................................................................................. 224
L5X transition structure .............................................................................. 224
L5K TRANSITION structure .................................................................. 225
Transition elements ...................................................................................... 225
Transition attributes ..................................................................................... 225
Stops ........................................................................................................................ 225
L5X stop structure ........................................................................................ 225
L5K STOP structure .................................................................................... 226
Stop attributes ................................................................................................ 226
Branches .................................................................................................................. 226
Branch attributes ........................................................................................... 227
Leg attributes .................................................................................................. 227
Directed links......................................................................................................... 227
L5X DirectedLink structure ....................................................................... 227
L5K DIRECTED_LINK structure .......................................................... 227
Directed link attributes ................................................................................ 227
Directed link guidelines ............................................................................... 228
Attachments........................................................................................................... 228
Tag configuration ................................................................................................. 229
L5X tag configuration structure................................................................. 229
L5K TAG_CONFIGURATION structure .......................................... 229
Tag configuration elements ......................................................................... 229
Expression component ........................................................................................ 229
L5X expression structure ............................................................................. 229
L5K EXPRESSION structure .................................................................... 230
Chapter 13
Define a task component
14
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 231

Task component ................................................................................................... 231
L5K TASK structure .................................................................................... 231
L5X task structure ......................................................................................... 231
Task elements ................................................................................................. 232
Task attributes ............................................................................................... 232
Task guidelines ...................................................................................................... 233
Table of contents
Examples ................................................................................................................. 233
Chapter 14
Define a parameter
connection component
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 235

Parameter connection component.................................................................... 235
L5K PARAMETER_CONNECTION structure ................................ 235
L5X ParameterConnection structure ....................................................... 235
Parameter connection attributes ................................................................ 235
Parameter connection guidelines ...................................................................... 236
Examples ................................................................................................................. 236
Chapter 15
Define a trend component
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 239

Trend component................................................................................................. 239
L5X trend structure ...................................................................................... 239
L5K TREND structure ................................................................................ 239
Trend elements .............................................................................................. 239
Trend attributes ............................................................................................. 240
Pen declaration ...................................................................................................... 242
L5X pen structure ......................................................................................... 242
L5K PEN structure ....................................................................................... 243
Pen elements ................................................................................................... 243
Pen attributes ................................................................................................. 243
Trend guidelines ................................................................................................... 244
Examples ................................................................................................................. 244
Chapter 16
Define a watch list
component
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 247

Quick watch list component .............................................................................. 247
L5X QuickWatchList structure ................................................................. 247
L5K QUICK_WATCH structure ........................................................... 247
Quick Watch elements................................................................................. 247
Quick Watch List attributes ....................................................................... 247
Watch tag attributes ..................................................................................... 248
Examples ................................................................................................................. 248
15
Table of contents
Chapter 17
Define controller
configuration objects
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 251

Controller objects ................................................................................................. 251
L5X config structure ..................................................................................... 251
L5K CONFIG structure ............................................................................. 251
Object elements ............................................................................................. 251
Config attributes............................................................................................ 252
Examples ................................................................................................................. 255
Chapter 18
Define custom properties
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 257

Custom properties data ....................................................................................... 257
Custom properties structure ....................................................................... 257
Custom properties elements ....................................................................... 258
Custom properties attributes ...................................................................... 258
Example ................................................................................................................... 258
Chapter 19
Structure Tags and
Comments in an
Import/Export File
16
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 259

Place information in a .CSV or .TXT file ....................................................... 259
Internal file comments ................................................................................. 259
Specify a tag record ............................................................................................... 259
TAG type record............................................................................................ 260
ALIAS type record ........................................................................................ 261
COMMENT type record ............................................................................ 261
Specify a comment record ................................................................................... 262
RCOMMENT Structure with Commas ................................................. 262
RCOMMENT Structure with Tabs......................................................... 262
TEXTBOX Structure with Commas ....................................................... 263
TEXTBOX Structure with Tabs ............................................................... 263
Specify an alarm message record ........................................................................ 263
ALMMSG Structure with Commas ......................................................... 264
ALMMSG Structure with Tabs ................................................................. 264
Examples ................................................................................................................. 265
Table of contents
Appendix A
Considerations for using
Microsoft Excel to edit a .CSV
file
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 269

Recommendations ................................................................................................ 269
Logix Designer data transformations ............................................................... 269
Microsoft Excel Data Transformation............................................................. 270
Appendix B
Import/Export revision
history
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 271

Backward compatibility ....................................................................................... 272
Import/Export version 2.19 Logix Designer application version 28......... 272
Import/Export version 2.11 Logix Designer version 20 .............................. 274
Import/Export version 2.10 Logix Designer version 19 .............................. 274
Import/Export version 2.8 Logix Designer version 18................................. 275
Changes to support MESSAGE tag enhancements ............................... 279
Import/Export version 2.0 Logix Designer version 9 ................................... 281
Motion changes to support the SERCOS Protocol ...................................... 281
MOTION_GROUP tag structure (version 1.1) ................................... 282
AXIS tag structure (version 1.1) ................................................................ 282
Import/Export version 1.1 Logix Designer version 8 ................................... 285
Index
17
Preface
This manual details how to import and export controller projects. You should be
familiar with how the Logix-based controller stores and processes data. This
manual is one of a set of related manuals that show common procedures for
programming and operating Logix5000 controllers.
For a complete list of common procedures manuals, refer to the Logix5000
Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual, publication 1756PM001.
The term Logix5000 controller refers to any controller that is based on the
Logix5000 operating system.
Studio 5000 environment
The Studio 5000 Automation Engineering & Design Environment combines

engineering and design elements into a common environment. The first element is
the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application. The Logix Designer application is
the rebranding of RSLogix 5000 software and will continue to be the product to
program Logix5000 controllers for discrete, process, batch, motion, safety, and
drive-based solutions.
The Studio 5000 environment is the foundation for the future of

Rockwell Automation engineering design tools and capabilities. The Studio 5000
environment is the one place for design engineers to develop all elements of their
control system.
Supported controllers
The supported controllers list includes:
1756-L71
1756-L71S
1756-L72
19
Preface
20
1756-L72S
1756-L73
1756-L73S
1756-L74
1756-L75
1756-L83E
1756-L85E
1769-L16ER-BB1B
1769-L18ER-BB1B
1769-L18ERM-BB1B
1769-L19ERM-BB1B
1769-L24ER-QB1B
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
1769-L30ER
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ERMS
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER
1769-L33ERM
1769-L33ERMS
1769-L36ERM
1769-L36ERMS
5069-L320ER
5069-L340ERM
Emulator
Preface
Additional resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell

Automation products.
Resource
Description
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,

publication 1770-4.1
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell

Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications webpage, available at

http://ab.rockwellautomation.com
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other

certification details.
You can view or download publications at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature. To order paper copies of
technical documentation, contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or
sales representative.
Legal Notices
Copyright Notice
2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
This document and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are
copyrighted by Rockwell Automation, Inc. Any reproduction and/or distribution
without prior written consent from Rockwell Automation, Inc. is strictly
prohibited. Please refer to the license agreement for details.
End User License Agreement (EULA)
You can view the Rockwell Automation End-User License Agreement ("EULA")
by opening the License.rtf file located in your product's install folder on your hard
drive.
Trademark Notices
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Automation, Studio 5000, Compact GuardLogix,
CompactLogix, ControlLogix, DriveLogix, FactoryTalk, FactoryTalk
Administration Console, FactoryTalk Batch, FactoryTalk Directory,
FactoryTalk Integrator, FactoryTalk Batch, FactoryTalk Security, FactoryTalk
Services Platform, FactoryTalk View Machine Edition, FactoryTalk View SE,
GuardLogix, Logix5000, Logix Designer, SoftLogix5800, FlexLogix, and
TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Any Rockwell Automation software or hardware not mentioned here is also a
trademark, registered or otherwise, of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Other Trademarks
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries. ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International.
21
Preface
DeviceNet is a trademark of OpenDeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA).

Ethernet/IP is a trademark of ControlNet International under license by ODVA.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby
acknowledged.
Warranty
This product is warranted in accordance with the product license. The products
performance may be affected by system configuration, the application being
performed, operator control, maintenance, and other related factors. Rockwell
Automation is not responsible for these intervening factors. The instructions in
this document do not cover all the details or variations in the equipment,
procedure, or process described, nor do they provide directions for meeting every
possible contingency during installation, operation, or maintenance. This
products implementation may vary among users.
This document is current as of the time of release of the product; however, the
accompanying software may have changed since the release. Rockwell Automation,
Inc. reserves the right to change any information contained in this document or
the software at any time without prior notice. It is your responsibility to obtain the
most current information available from Rockwell when installing or using this
product.
Environmental Compliance
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on
its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/aboutus/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page
Contact Rockwell
Customer Support Telephone 1.440.646.3434
Online Support http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/
22
Chapter 1
Introduction
This document describes how to use the import/export feature that is included
with the Logix Designer application.
With a Logix controller, you can import and export an entire project or import
and export parts of a project. Select the import/export format based on what you
want from the content.
If you want:
Then use this format:
The entire controller project
L5K or L5X
Individual portions of the controller project
L5X
Tags and logic comments
CSV or TXT
This chapter shows how to perform the import/export operations.
Export a Project to an .L5K

Text File
You can export a project to a text file and use any text editor that supports UTF8
file format to modify the project. The exported file will be an .L5K format.
Do these steps to export a project to an .L5K text file.
1. Make sure the project you want to export is open.
2. In the Logix Designer application, click File > Save As.
23
Chapter 1
The Save As dialog box opens.
3. Browse to where you want to save the file.

4. In the File name field, type the name of the text file.
5. From the Save as type list, click the .L5K file format and click Save.
Important:
Import an .L5K text file
The application automatically saves any unsaved edits when you click OK.
Import controller information from a saved text file that has an .L5K extension.
This lets you use any text editor to create a project.
Do these steps to import an .L5K text file into a project.
1. In the Logix Designer application, from the File menu, choose Open.
24
Chapter 1
The Open Import Project dialog box opens.
2. Select the .L5K text file you want to import and click Open.
The Save Imported Project As dialog box opens.
3. Browse to where you want to save the imported project.
25
Chapter 1
4. In the File name box, type the name for the imported project and click
Import.
Important:
If you import a project that has forces, the project defaults to Forces Disabled, even if the
project was exported with Forces Enabled.
When you import an .L5K file, the project changes so that you cannot go online and access a
previously downloaded controller. You must first upload from or download to the controller. See
Maintaining Controller Access on page 36.
Export a Project to an .L5X

XML File
You can export a project to an XML file and use a text or XML editor to modify
the project. The exported file will be an .L5X format.
Do these steps to export from a project to an .L5X XML file.
1. Make sure the project you want to export from is already open.
2. In the Logix Designer application, click File > Save As.
26
Chapter 1
3. In the File name box, type the name of the file.

4. From the Save as type list, click .L5X file format and click Save.
Important:
Import an .L5X XML File
The application automatically saves any unsaved edits when you click OK.
Import controller information from a saved XML file that has an .L5X extension
and is a full controller export. This lets you use any editor to create a project.
Do these steps to import a controller .L5X XML file into a project.
1. In the Logix Designer application, click File > Open.
The Open Project dialog box opens.
2. In the File name box, select the .L5X controller file you want to import and
click Open.
27
Chapter 1
The Save Imported Project As dialog box opens.
3. Browse to where you want to save the imported project.

4. In the File name box, type the name for the project and click Import.
Important:
If you import a project that has forces, the project defaults to Forces Disabled, even if the
project was exported with Forces Enabled.
When you import an .L5X file, the project changes so that you cannot go online and access a
previously downloaded controller. You must first upload from or download to the controller. See
Maintaining Controller Access on page 36.
Export to a .CSV or .TXT file
When you have a project open, you can export tags and logic comments to a
structured file that separates values with commas (.CSV file) or that separates
values with tabs (.TXT Unicode file). You can then use other applications, such as
Microsoft Excelor Notepad, to edit the tags and logic comments.
Do these steps to export tags and logic comments to a structured file.
1. Make sure the project from which you want to export tags and comments is
already open.
28
Chapter 1
2. In the Logix Designer application, click Tools > Export > Tags and Logic
Comments.
The Export dialog box opens.
3. In the File name box, type the name of the file to be exported.
4. From the Save as type list, click .CSV or .TXT format.
29
Chapter 1
The .TXT import/export format supports double-byte characters, so you

can use this format for all languages, including Chinese, Japanese, and
Korean. The .CSV import/export format does not support
double-byte characters.
5. From the Tags and Logic Comments list, set the scope of the tags and logic
comments to be exported.
6. Click Export.
Scope
Exported Material
All
All the tags (controller-scope, program-scope, equipment phase, and Add-On Instruction) or logic comments in the
project
Controller and All Programs/Phases
Tags only; all controller-scope, program-scope, and equipment phase tags
Controller
Tags only; the controller-scoped tags of the project
All Programs/Phases
Logic Comments only; all program and equipment phase comments
Programs
Equipment Phases
Add-On Instructions
The tags or logic comments of a specific program, equipment phase, or Add-On Instruction
Import a .CSV or .TXT file
When you are offline and have a project open, you can import tags and logic
comments from a saved .CSV file or .TXT file. This lets you use other
applications, such as Microsoft Excel or Notepad, to create and edit tags
and logic comments.
Do these steps to import tags and logic comments from a saved .CSV file or .TXT
file into a project.
30
Chapter 1
1. In the Logix Designer application, click Tools > Import > Tags and Logic
Comments.
The Import dialog box opens.
2. In the File name box, select the .CSV or .TXT file you want to import.
3. From the File of type list, select .CSV or .TXT format.
Tip:
Use the File of type list to filter .CSV or .TXT files in the Import dialog box.
4. From the Tags lists, specify how you want to handle tag collisions.
31
Chapter 1
Important:
When you import tags, the tags in the import file may have the same
name as tags that are already in the open project. This condition is a
collision.
If you want to:
From the Tags menu select:
Replace tags in the project with tags from the import file, in addition to
adding any new tags from the import file
Create New Tags & Overwrite Existing Tags
Keep tags that are in the project and discard colliding tags in the import
file, in addition to adding any new tags from the import file
Create New Tags & Overwrite Existing Tags
Replace tags in the project with tags from the import file, but do not add Create New Tags & Overwrite Existing Tags
any new tags from the import file
Important:
If you delete tags from the .CSV or .TXT file and import the file, the process
does not delete the tags from the controller project. Use the programming
software to delete tags from the controller project.
5. From the Logic Comments list, specify how you want to handle logic
comment collisions.
Important:
When you import logic comments, the possibility exists for the comments in the import file to
differ from the comments in the open project when both are matched to the same logic.
If you want to:
From the Logic Comments list select:
Replace comments in the project with comments

Import New Comments & Overwrite Existing Comments
from the import file, in addition to adding any new
comments from the import file
Keep comments that are in the project and discard Import New Comments & Preserve Existing Comments
colliding comments in the import file, in addition to
adding any new comments from the import file
Replace comments in the project with comments
from the import file, but do not add any new
comments from the import file
Skip New Comments & Overwrite Existing Comments
6. Choose how to match comments to logic and click Import.

If you want rung comments
applied to:
Then:
The next rung that has the instruction, as specified Make sure that the Leave the Match all ladder diagram
in the Owning Element, as its last instruction on the rung comments by rung only check box is cleared.
rung
This is the default and recommended option.
The Location element is ignored.
The rung number specified in the Location element Select the Match all ladder diagram rung comments by
rung only check box.
This overrides the default and recommended option.
The Owning Element is ignored.
32
If you want rung comments

applied to:
Important:
Export source-protected
logic
Chapter 1
Then:
If a .CSV file or .TXT file contains changes to tags, including aliases, when you import the file that
the project changes such that you cannot go online and access a previously downloaded
controller. You must first upload from or download to the controller.
If you only modify comments or descriptions before you import a .CSV file or .TXT file, you can go
online with the controller.
Starting with version 20, you can configure how source-protected content is
exported in .L5K and .L5X files.
By default, source-protected content is now exported in an encrypted format to
prevent viewing or modifying components in the system. A check box option on
the Workstation Options dialog box enables Add-On Instructions and routines
to be exported in a readable, cleartext format if the source keys for those
components are present in the sk.dat file. This lets you modify protected content
in a third-party tool, such as an XML editor.
Important:
You must enable your workstation for source protection to use the cleartext option on the Workstation Option dialog box. Otherwise, the check box, is not
available and source-protected content is exported in an encrypted format.
Perform a partial or full-project export in cleartext when these parameters are

available:
Your workstation has source protection enabled.
The Workstation Option dialog box (Always Encode Source Protection

Content On Export) is not selected.
The sk. dat file has been specified and it contains the source key (password)
for the content. For details, see the Logix5000 Controllers Security
Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM016.
If any of these requirements are absent, the content is exported in an encrypted

format.
Export in a Cleartext Format

Use the same procedure for partial exporting a component or a full project in
readable text. Do these steps.
1. Open a project in the Logix Designer application that contains the content
that you want to export.
33
Chapter 1
2. On the Menu bar, click Tools > Options.
The Workstation Options dialog box opens with the export check box
option if your personal computer is enabled for source protection.
3. Clear the Always Encode Source Protected Content On Export check

box.
There is a similar check box on the Save As and Export component dialog
boxes that you must clear to export in cleartext from those dialog boxes.
If you select the Always Encode Source Protected Content On Export
check box on the Workstation Options dialog box, the application always
exports source-protected content in an encrypted format, even when source
keys for the content are present.
Important:
You cannot copy source-protected content from version 21 of the application and paste into
earlier software versions. The pasting function is disabled in previous software versions when
source-protected content is placed on the clipboard.
4. Click OK.
34
Chapter 1
5. Take one of these actions:
To export a component, right-click the component and choose Export

Routine. The component Export dialog box opens. Clear the Encode
Source Protected Content check box. Click the Export button.
To save data for exporting as an .L5X or .L5K file, proceed to step 6.
6. On the Menu bar, click File > Save As.
7. From the Save as type list, select the .L5K or .L5X option, depending on
your file type.
The Encode Source Protected Content check box is available when you
choose the .L5K or .L5X option.
35
Chapter 1
Important:
The Encode Source Protected Content check box is only enabled when the Always Encode
Source Protected Content on Export check box in the Workstation Options dialog box is
cleared.
The Encode Source Protected Content check box also appears on the component dialog box.
8. Clear Encode Source Protected Content check box to export content in

cleartext.
9. Click Save.
See examples of encoded and unencoded codes for Add-On Instructions
and Routines on page 99 and page 145, respectively.
Maintaining controller
access
The controller manages project status to provide Logix Designer application with
the information to decide whether you can go online with a controller.
Information
Description
Creation Stamp
The controller creates a creation stamp when you create, and import, a project and download the project to the
controller. The creation stamp in the controller and the project file must match to enable Logix Designer application
to go online with a controller.
If a project is exported to an .L5K file and then imported, the resulting project .ACD file gets a new creation stamp.
This means that the Logix Designer application views the imported project as different from the file that was
exported. The result is that you cannot use the new, imported project file to access a controller that was downloaded
with the original file, before it was exported. At this point, your only options are to download again from the
imported project file or to upload the controller contents to another project .ACD file and merge with the
documentation from one of the older project .ACD files.
Download Stamp
The controller creates a download stamp on each download and stores this stamp in both the project and the
controller. When the creation stamp and the download stamp in the controller match those in the project file, Logix
Designer application can use the project to let you access the controller online.
If you change a project file when offline, that also clears the download stamp. This can occur when you import from
an .L5X file or if you import a .CSV file that creates a new tag or modifies a tag data type. When you reset the
download stamp, you can either download the project to the controller or upload the contents from the controller. If
you choose to upload, you lose any changes made through import. Note that description and rung comment changes
in a .CSV file do not reset the download stamp, so you can perform some .CSV file imports and still maintain access to
the controller.
Change Log
Each time you change a controller online, the controller stores details about the change in a change log. If there are
more than 1000 changes made to the project file since you last went online with the controller, you must either
download the project to the controller or upload the contents from the controller. If you choose to upload, you lose
any changes made through import.
Given this status information, these situations prevent you from going online with
a controller.
36
Chapter 1
Situations When You Cannot Go Online with a Controller
Possible Recovery
More than 1000 controller edits were made.
Full download to the controller
A download of another project copy with identical creation stamps occurred.
Upload from the controller to a new project
Changes were made to the offline project, excluding documentation and tag value changes.
Upload from the controller and merge with an existing project.
A controller nonvolatile storage load occurred and the loaded image has the same creation stamp but a
different download stamp.
A controller nonvolatile storage load occurred and the loaded image has the same creation and download
stamps but the change log is dated earlier than the project file.
The project was exported and then reimported. In this case, the software considers it a different project and Full download to the controller
it has its own unique stamps.
Upload from the controller to a new project.
A different project, with different stamps, was downloaded.
A controller nonvolatile storage load occurred, and the image was generated from a completely different
project file, with different stamps.
.L5X file structure
An upload/merge of documentation is not possible in these cases.
The .L5X import/export file consists of the components listed in the table. The
.L5X format for each component is described in subsequent chapters of this
reference manual.
Component
Description
Chapter
<RSLogix5000Content>
Describes version and export information
This chapter, see example below
<Controller>
The controller
Chapter 2 Defining a Controller Component on page 51
<DataTypes>
User-defined and I/O data structures
Chapter 3 Defining a Datatype Component on page 65
<Modules>
Modules in the controller organizer
Chapter 4 Defining a Module Component on page 71
<AddOnInstructionDefinitions>
Add-On Instructions
Chapter 5 Defining an Add-On Instruction Component on page 87
<Tags>
Controller-scope tags
Chapter 6 Defining a Tag Component on page 107
<Programs>
Programs
Chapter 7 Defining a Program Component on page 141
<Routines>
Ladder logic, function block diagram, sequential

function chart, and structured text routines
Chapter 8 Defining a Ladder Logic Routine on page 151

Chapter 9 Defining a Function Block Diagram Routine on page 163
Chapter 10 Defining a Sequential Function Chart Routine on page 187
Chapter 11 Defining a Structured Text Routine on page 209
<Tasks>
Controller tasks
Chapter 12 Defining a Task Component on page 231
<ParameterConnection>
Parameter connections
Chapter 13 Defining a Parameter Connection on page 235
<ParameterConnections>
Program parameter connections
Chapter 14 Defining a Parameter Connection on page 235
<Trends>
Any trend configured for the controller project
Chapter 15 Defining a Trend Component on page 239
<QuickWatchLists>
All quick watch lists configured in the controller project Chapter 16 Defining a Watch List Component on page 247
<CommPorts>, <CST>, and <WallClockTime> Controller configuration objects
Chapter 17 Defining Controller Configuration Objects on page 251
The Controller component is the overall structure of the import/export file. It

contains the configuration information and logic of the controller project.
Preceding the Controller component is an optional XML declaration and a
37
Chapter 1
required root element tag (RSLogix5000Content) that includes Logix Designer

application version information.
All components in an .L5X import/export file follow this structure.

<component_type [attribute_list]>
[body]
</component_type>
Item
Description
<component_type>
The component begin tag.
attribute_list
List of attributes for the component in the form:

attribute_name="attribute_value"
Separate attributes with a space.
body
The content of the component. The content could include any

subcomponents, for example, routines contained within a program, or a
description of the component. The content could also include information
about the component, for example, the data for a tag component.
The body of the component is optional.
Internet
Explorer</component_type>Internet
ExplorerInternet Explorer
The component end tag.

A component with no content in the body may combine its begin and end
tag as one tag:
(<component_type attribute_list />
The .L5X file is an ASCII file that is structured by using Extensible Markup
Language (XML). In addition to being able to open and modify the .L5X file in a
text editor, such as Notepad, you can also view the contents of the file in Internet
Explorer and other tools that work with .XML files.
38
If you use:
Chapter 1
You see:
A text editor, such as Notepad A text file, such as:
Edit this file in the text editor.

An Internet browser, such as
Internet Explorer
An .XML file, such as:
In the Internet browser, you can view only the file. Click the plus (+) and minus (-) to expand and collapse the viewable content. To edit the file,
open the file in a text editor.
39
Chapter 1
.L5X file conventions
The import/export feature L5X format is structured by using the Extensible

Markup Language (XML). The XML specification is an open standard and is
widely documented elsewhere. The only special convention used to describe the
L5X format in this document is that items shown in square brackets ([ ]) are
optional.
White space characters include spaces, tabs, carriage returns, new line, and form
feeds. These characters can occur anywhere in an import/export file, except in
keywords or names. If white space characters occur outside of descriptions, they
are ignored.
Internal file comments

Enter internal file comments to document your .L5X import files by using the
XML commenting format. The import process ignores these comments. Place
comments anywhere in an import/export .L5X file except within XML tag
elements. You cannot next a comment within another comment.
An XML comment begins with the character sequence . The comment appears between the begin and end
character sequence. The character sequence -- may not appear within a comment.
The text of the comment is ignored by the XML parser. This is an example.

Component Descriptions
Descriptions of components are optional. Unlike internal file comments,
descriptions of components are imported. To add a description to a component,
add a <Description> start tag element as the first sub-element of the component
and then the description as a CDATA element in the body of the <Description>
element.
Component descriptions are brought into the project without being processed by
the XML parser for markup language. The description text is contained in a
CDATA element, a standard in the XML specification. A CDATA element
begins with the character sequence <![CDATA[ and ends with the character
sequence ]]>. None of the text within the CDATA element is interpreted by the
XML parser. The CDATA element preserves formatting so there is no need to use
control characters to enter formatted descriptions.
<Task Name="Task1" Type="PERIODIC" Rate="1000" Priority="10"
Watchdog="500" DisableUpdateOutputs="false"
InhibitTask="false">
<Description>
40
Chapter 1
<![CDATA[
This is a task description with
a line feed and a quote.
]]>
</Description>
</Task>
Boolean attribute values

Many boolean attributes in the L5K format may have a value of 1 (enabled) or 0
(disabled). In the L5X format, these same attributes have a value of true (enabled)
or false (disabled). Throughout this manual, a value of true or false should be
specified in the L5X format for any attributes that indicate a value of 1 or 0.
Data display style

Tags and data types support a radix attribute that specifies how to display the
associated numerical information in the Logix Designer application.
Radix Display Option
Example (based on 15 decimal)
Binary (uses a 2# prefix)
2#0000_0000_0000_1111
Octal (uses a 8# prefix)
8#000_017
Decimal
15
Hex (uses a 16# prefix)
16#000F
Ascii
$00$0F
Exponential
1.5000000e+01
Float
15.0
Data formats
The Logix Designer application imports the data in tags, modules, and data
structures (default values) with a <Data> element. You can import the <Data>
element in three different formats from the .L5X file: raw, L5K, and decorated
format. The format is indicated by a Format attribute.
<Tag Name="bINTtag" TagType="Base" DataType="INT"
Radix="Decimal">
<Data>05 00</Data>
<Data Format="L5K">
<![CDATA[5 ]]>
</Data>
41
Chapter 1
<Data Format="Decorated">
<DataValue DataType="INT" Radix="Decimal" Value="5"/>
</Data>
</Tag>
The application exports all data values in both raw and decorated data format to
the .L5X export file, with the exception that the InputTag under a module
connection does not have the raw data format exported.
If multiple formats are present in the .L5X file, they must appear in the order of
raw, L5K (if present), and decorated format. The data overwrites previous values if
different. For example, if the decorated data is manipulated in the .L5X file, the
decorated data values overwrite the raw data on import.
Raw data format
Raw data format is a hex dump of the data and includes hidden (config) data. It is
not intended to be readable. It is exported in the same format for all types of data
types. The raw data format is the default format. A format attribute is not present
if the <Data> element is in raw format.
Data Type
Raw Data Export Format
Atomic
Example: an INT tag

<Data>05 00</Data>
Array of an Atomic Data

Type
Example: an array of 4 INT tags

<Data>02 00 03 00 04 00 05 00</Data>
Structure Data Type
Example: a TIMER tag

<Data>00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 05 00 00 00</Data>
Array of a Structure Data Type Example: an array of 3 TIMER tags

<Data>00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 07 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 09 00 00 00</Data>
L5K Data Format

L5K data format is the same data format that appears in an .L5K file, wrapped in a
CDATA element. It is exported in the same format for all types of data types. It is
indicated by the Format="L5K" attribute in the <Data> start tag element.
The L5K data format is not exported during a full project or component L5X
format. However, it is imported if present in an .L5X file. This format is provided
to enable customers to leverage the L5K data format as they convert their auto
generation tools from L5K to L5X format.
42
Data Type
L5K Data Export Format
Atomic
Example: an INT tag

<Data Format="L5K">
<![CDATA[5 ]]>
</Data>
Array of an Atomic Data Type

<Data Format="L5K">
<![CDATA[[2,3,4,5] ]]>
</Data>
Structure Data Type

<Data Format="L5K">
<![CDATA[[0,1,5] ]]>
</Data>
Chapter 1
Array of a Structure Data Type Example: an array of 3 TIMER tags

<Data Format="L5K">
<![CDATA[[[0,1,5],[0,2,7],[0,5,9]] ]]>
</Data>
Decorated Data Format

Decorated data format is verbose and provides a human readable format of the
data. It was added to the L5X format in version 17 of the application, for both
L5X full project and L5X component exports and is recommended over the L5K
format. The format of the data varies by data type. The decorated data format is
indicated by the Format="Decorated" attribute in the <Data> start
tag element.
Data Type
Decorated Data Export Format
Atomic
Example: an INT tag

<DataValue DataType="INT" Radix="Decimal" Value="5"/>
</Data>
Array of an Atomic Data Type

<Array DataType="INT" Dimensions="4" Radix="Decimal">
<Element Index="[0]" Value="2"/>
</Array>
</Data>
43
Chapter 1
Data Type
Structure Data Type

<Structure DataType="TIMER">
<DataValueMember Name="PRE" DataType="DINT" Radix="Decimal"
Value="1"/>
<DataValueMember Name="ACC" DataType="DINT" Radix="Decimal"
Value="5"/>
<DataValueMember Name="EN" DataType="BOOL" Value="0"/>
<DataValueMember Name="TT" DataType="BOOL" Value="0"/>
<DataValueMember Name="DN" DataType="BOOL" Value="0"/>
</Structure>
</Data>
44
Data Type
Array Structure Data Type
Example: an array of 3 TIMER tags

<Array DataType="TIMER" Dimensions="3">
<Element Index="[0]">
Value="1"/>
Value="5"/>
</Structure>
</Element>
Value="2"/>
Value="7"/>
</Structure>
</Element>
Value="5"/>
Value="9"/>
</Structure>
</Element>
</Array>
</Data>
Tip:
Chapter 1
If the decorated data for a tag exceeds 16 KB, the decorated data format will not be exported. In this case, the raw data format will preserve the data values of the tag.
Force Values
Force values are indicated with an additional <ForceData> XML tag element for
both raw and L5K data formats. However, for decorated data, force values are
indicated with ForceValue attribute in the <DataValue> XML tag element of the
decorated data format.
45
Chapter 1
<Tag Name="aDINTTag" TagType="Produced"

DataType="DINT" Radix="Decimal">
<ProduceInfo ProduceCount="1"
ProgrammaticallySendEventTrigger="false"
UnicastPermitted="false"/>
<Data>03 00 00 00</Data>
<ForceData>00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF 07 00 00
00
</ForceData>
<Data Format="L5K">
<![CDATA[3 ]]>
</Data>
<ForceData Format="L5K">
<![CDATA[[0,0,0,0,-1,-1,-1,-1,7,0,0,0] ]]>
</ForceData>
<Data Format="Decorated"><DataValue
DataType="DINT" Radix="Decimal" Value="3"
ForceValue="7"/>
</Data>
</Tag>
.L5K file structure
The .L5K import/export file contains these components. The L5K format for
each component is described in subsequent chapters of this reference manual.
Component
Description
See Chapter
CONTROLLER
The controller
Chapter 2 Define a Controller Component on page 51
DATATYPE
User-defined and I/O data structures
Chapter 3 Define a Datatype Component on page 65
MODULE
Modules in the controller organizer
Chapter 4 Define a Module Component on page 71
ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_
DEFINITION
Add-On Instructions
Chapter 5 Define an Add-On Instruction Component on page 87
TAG
Chapter 6 Define a Tag Component on page 107
PROGRAM
Program files
Chapter 7 Define a Program Component on page 141
ROUTINE
Ladder logic routines
Chapter 8 Define a Ladder Logic Routine on page 151
FBD_ROUTINE
Function block diagram routines
Chapter 9 Define a Function Block Diagram Routine on page 163
SFC_ROUTINE
Sequential function chart routine
Chapter 10 Define a Sequential Function Chart Routine on page 187
ST_ROUTINE
Structured text routine
Chapter 11 Define a Structured Text Routine on page 209
TASK
Controller tasks
Chapter 12 Define a Task Component on page 231
PARAMETER_CONNECTION
Program Parameter connections
Chapter 13 Define a Parameter Connection on page 235
TREND
Any trend configured for the controller project
Chapter 14 Define a Trend Component on page 239
WATCH_LIST
All quick watch lists configured in the controller project
Chapter 15 Define a Watch List Component on page 247
CONFIG
Configuration information
Chapter 16 Define Controller Configuration Objects on page 251
The CONTROLLER component is the overall structure of the import/export

file. It contains the configuration information and logic of the controller project.
46
Chapter 1
The header remarks (optional) and the version statement come before the
CONTROLLER component.
Import-Export
Version := RSLogix 5000 16.00
Owner
:= User Name, Rockwell Automation
Exported := Tue May 13 08:39:40 2014
IE_VER := 2.17;
All components in an L5K import/export file follow this structure.

Component_Type <component_name> [Attributes]
[body]
END_Component_Type
.L5K file conventions
Item
Description
Component_Type
The component.
component_name
A specific instance of the component.
Attributes
Any attributes of the component.

Component descriptions appear as an attribute of the component.
Separate each attribute with a comma (,).
body
Any subcomponents (children) of this component.
END_Component_Type
End of the component information.
The import/export feature L5K format described in this document is based on the
formats specified by the IEC 1131-3 specification.
Convention
Description
< >
Items shown in angle brackets are required.
[ ]
Items shown in square brackets are optional.
user_value
Items in italics indicate user-supplied information.
LITERAL
Items in all uppercase indicate a required keyword or symbol that must

be entered as shown.
"["
Items in double quotes are required characters.
White space characters include spaces, tabs, carriage returns, new line, and form
feeds. These characters can occur anywhere in an import/export file, except in
keywords or names. If white space characters occur outside of descriptions, they
are ignored.

Enter comments to document import files. The import process ignores these
comments. Place comments anywhere in an import/export file, except in names
47
Chapter 1
and descriptions. Enter comments by starting the line (record) with REMARK
and a comma.
Component descriptions
Descriptions of components are optional. Unlike internal file comments,
descriptions are imported. The description of a component is added as an attribute
of the component in the L5K format. Place the description within double quotes.
See this example.
TASK Task1 (Description := "Hello World",
Type := PERIODIC, Rate := 1000,
Priority := 10, Watchdog := 500,
DisableUpdateOutputs := No)
END_TASK
To enter control characters in the description, precede the character with a dollar
sign ($). This table shows how to enter the supported control characters in a
description.
Character
Required Entry
$$
"
$Q
10 (line feed)
$L or $l
13,10 (carriage return, line feed)
$N or $n
12 (form feed)
$P or $p
13 (carriage return)
$R or $r
9 (tab)
$T or $t
xxxx (4-digit character code that represents a

hexadecimal value)
$xxxx
Display style
Tags and data types support a radix attribute that specifies how to display the
associated numerical information in the Logix Designer application.
48
Binary (uses a 2# prefix)
2#0000_0000_0000_1111
Octal (uses a 8# prefix)
8#000_017
Decimal
15
Project documentation
Hex (uses a 16# prefix)
16#000F
Ascii
$00$0F
Exponential
1.5000000e+01
Float
15.0
Chapter 1
Starting with version 17 of the application, you can display project

documentation, such as tag descriptions and rung comments for any supported
localized language. You can store project documentation for multiple languages in
a single project file rather than in language-specific project files. Define all the
localized languages that the project will support and set the current, default, and
optional custom localized language. The software uses the default language if the
content of the current language is blank for a particular component of the project.
However, you can use a custom language to tailor documentation to a specific type
of project file user.
Enter the localized descriptions in your Logix Designer application project when
programming in that language or when using the import/export utility to translate
the documentation off-line and import it back into the project. Once you enable
project documentation in the Logix Designer application, you can dynamically
switch between languages as you use the software.
These project documentation variables are available for any supported localized
language:
Component descriptions in tags, routines, programs, equipment phases,

user-defined data types, and Add-On Instructions
Engineering units and state identifiers added to tags, user-defined data

types, or Add-On Instructions
Trends
Controllers
Alarm messages (in configuration of ALARM_ANALOG and

ALARM_DIGITAL tags)
Tasks
Property descriptions for a module in the Controller Organizer
Rung comments, Sequential Function Chart text boxes, and Function

Block Diagram text boxes
49
Chapter 1
The localized comments are exported in all formats, L5K, L5X, CSV, and TXT.
For more information on enabling a project to support multiple translations of
project documentation, see the online help.
50
Chapter 2
Define a controller component
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the controller component.
Controller component
The controller component contains the overall structure of a project to be

executed on one controller. It contains the configuration information and logic
that you download to one controller.
L5X controller structure

<Controller [controller_attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<RedundancyInfo [redundancyinfo_attributes]/>
<Security [security_attributes]/>
<PrimaryActionSets>
<PrimaryActionSet
PermissionSet=PermissionSetName1 IsPermissionSet=true>
<![CDATA[ encoded_cached_permissions
]]>
</PrimaryActionSet>
<PrimaryActionSet
PermissionSet=PermissionSetName2 IsPermissionSet=false>
<![CDATA[ encoded_cached_permissions
]]>
</PrimaryActionSet>
</ PrimaryActionSets >

</Security>
<SafetyInfo [safetyinfo_attributes]>
<SafetyTagMap>
[comma separated safety tag map]
</SafetyTagMap>
</SafetyInfo>
<DataTypes>
[datatype]
</DataTypes>
<Modules>
[module]
</Modules>
51
Chapter 2
[addoninstructiondefinition]
</AddOnInstructionDefinitions>
<Tags>
[tag]
</Tags>
<Programs>
[program]
</Programs>
<Tasks>
[task]
</Tasks>
[parameter_connection]
</ParameterConnections>
<CommPorts>
[commport]
</CommPorts>
<CST [attribute_list] />
<WallClockTime [attribute_list] />
<Trends>
[trend]
</Trends>
<QuickWatchLists>s
[watch_list]
</QuickWatchLists>
< InternetProtocol [Internet_Protocol_Attributes] />
<EthernetPorts>
<EthernetPort [Ethernet_Port_Attributes] />
<EthernetPort [Ethernet_Port_Attributes] />
</EthernetPorts>
<EthernetNetwork [Ethernet_Network_Attributes] />
</Controller>
Tip:
The L5X controller structure must be contained within an RSLogix5000Content root element begin tag (<RSLogix5000Content>) and end tag
(</RSLogix5000Content>). See the .L5X File Structure on page 37 in Chapter 1 for more information.
L5K CONTROLLER structure

CONTROLLER <controller_name> [(Description := "text",
Controller_Attributes)]
[<DATATYPE declaration>]
[<MODULE declaration>]
[<ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION declaration]
TAG
[<tag declarations>]
END_TAG
52
Chapter 2
[<PROGRAM declaration>]
[<TASK declaration>]
[PARAMETER_CONNECTION declaration]
[<TREND declaration>]
[<QUICK_WATCH declaration>]
PRIMARY_ACTION_SET <permission_set_name>
(IsPermissionSet := Yes) :=
encoded_cached_permissions;
END_PRIMARY_ACTION_SET
[<CONFIG controller objects declaration>]
END_CONTROLLER
Controller elements
The table describes the elements comprising a controller.
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
controller_name
The name of the controller project.

In L5X, use a name attribute on the <Controller> element.
Description
Description
User information about the controller project
RedundancyInfo
N/A
For L5X format, this element contains redundancy attributes.
Security
N/A
For L5X format, this element contains security attributes.
SafetyInfo
N/A
For L5X format, this element contains safety controller attributes.
DataTypes
DATATYPE
I/O and user-defined data structures
Modules
MODULE
Devices in the controller organizer
AddOnInstructionDefinitions
ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_
DEFINITION
Add-On instructions
Tags
TAG
Programs
PROGRAM
Programs
Tasks
TASK
Tasks
ParameterConnections
PARAMETER_CONNECTIONS
Program parameter connections
Trends
TREND
Controller trends
QuickWatchLists
QUICK_WATCH
List of watch tags specified for a quick watch list
CommPorts, CST, WallClockTime
CONFIG
Characteristics of controller objects (status information)
PrimaryActionSet
PRIMARY_ACTION_SET
Cache of permissions for the Guest Users group that are associated with the specified logical
name or permission set.
53
Chapter 2
Controller attributes
Attribute
Description
Use
L5X only. Specify context or target.
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the controller component.

In L5K, the name is an element of the controller component.
ProcessorType
Specify the type of controller. (1756-L71, 1756-L71S, 1756-L72, 1756-L72S, 1756-L73, 1756-L73S,
1756-L74, 1756-L75, 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ERQB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L30ER-NSE,
1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L36ERM, Emulator)
Major
L5K only. Specify the major revision number (1...127) of the controller.
MajorRev
L5X only. Specify the major revision number (1...127) of the controller.
MinorRev
L5X only. Specify the minor revision number (1...127) of the controller.
TimeSlice
Percentage of available CPU time (10...90) that is assigned to communication.
ShareUnusedTimeSlice
Specify whether to share an unused timeslice or not. Type a 0 to not share; type a 1 to share.
PowerLossProgram
Name of the program to be executed upon restart after a power loss.
MajorFaultProgram
Name of the program to be executed when a major fault occurs.
CommPath
Specify the devices in the communication path. The communication path ends with the controller
(\Backplane\1). This is exported only if you select manual configuration of the communication path
in RSLinx software.
CommDriver
Specify the type of communication driver. This is the name of the selected driver in RSLinx
software. This is exported only if you select manual configuration of the communication driver in
RSLinx software.
RedundancyEnabled
L5K only. Specify whether redundancy is used or not. Type a 0 to disable redundancy; type a 1 to
enable redundancy.
Enabled
L5X only. Specify whether redundancy is used (true or false).

This attribute is on the <RedundancyInfo> tag element.
KeepTestEditsOnSwitchOver
Specify whether to keep test edits on when a switchover occurs in a redundant system. Type a 0
not to keep test edits on; type a 1 to keep test edits on.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <RedundancyInfo> tag element. Type false or true.
IOMemoryPadPercentage
Specify the percentage (0...100) of I/O memory that is available to the system after the download
when configured for redundancy.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <RedundancyInfo> tag element.
DataTablePadPercentage
Specify the percentage (0...100) of the data table to reserve. If redundancy is not enabled, type 0. If
redundancy is enabled, type 50.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <RedundancyInfo> tag element.
SecurityCode
L5K only. Specify whether the RSI Security Server is enabled for the controller. Type 0 if the
controller is unsecured; type a 10-digit, non-zero value if the controller is secured.
Code
L5X only. Specify whether the RSI Security Server is enabled for the controller. Type 0 if the
controller is unsecured; type a 10-digit, non-zero value if the controller is secured.
This attribute is on the <Security> tag element.
54
Chapter 2
Attribute
Description
SFCExecutionControl
Specify whether the SFC executes the current active steps before returning control (CurrentActive)
or whether the SFC executes all threads until reaching a false transition (UntilFalse).
SFCRestartPosition
Specify whether the SFC restarts at the most recently executed step (MostRecent) or at the initial
step (InitialStep).
SFCLastScan
Specify how the SFC manages its state on a last scan. Select AutomaticReset, ProgrammaticReset,
or DontScan.
SerialNumber
L5K only. Specify the serial number of the controller. If a serial number is specified, it is imported
into the project regardless of the MatchProjectToController setting. Type a 32-bit, hexadecimal
number with the 16# prefix, such as 16#0012_E2BC.
ProjectSN
L5X only. Specify the serial number of the controller. If a serial number is specified, it is imported
into the project regardless of the MatchProjectToController setting. Type a 32-bit, hexadecimal
number with the 16# prefix, such as 16#0012_E2BC.
MatchProjectToController
Specify whether to be sure that the project matches the controller or not. Type Yes or No.
InhibitAutomaticFirmwareUpdate
Specify whether to inhibit the automatic update of controller firmware. Type a 0 to not inhibit;
type a 1 to inhibit.
CurrentProjectLanguage
Specify the current project language for a project documentation project.
DefaultProjectLanguage
Specify the default project language for a project document at on project.
ControllerLanguage
Specify the controller project language for a project document at on project.
CanUseRPIFromController
Specify whether the consumed tags in the controller can connect to the producer with an RPI
provided by the producer (true or false).
SecurityAuthorityID
ID of the FactoryTalk Diagnostics to which your controller is bound.

For L5X only, this attribute is on the <Security> tag element.
SecurityAuthorityURI
Network path to the FactoryTalk Diagnostics to which your controller is bound.

PermissionSet
Name of the set of permissions, configured in FactoryTalk Security, to apply to this object.
ChangesToDetect
Mask that specifies the controller events that you wish to track.
TrustedSlots
Mask defining the slots through which the trusted communication is permitted to the controller.
For L5X only, this attribute is on the <Security> tag element
PassThroughConfiguration
For L5K and L5X. Indicates the pass through state of documentation for the project.
Type Disabled, Enabled, or EnabledWithAppend
DownloadProjectDocumentationAndExtendedProperties
For L5K and L5X. Indicates the download project documentation configuration setting of the
project.
DownloadCustomProperties
For L5K and L5X. Indicates the download custom properties configuration setting of the project.
Only applies if the project is already configured to DownloadProjectDocumentation.
Rockwell recommends setting this attribute to false only during startup testing to improve
download speeds during commissioning testing. It should be set to true for the normal operating
state of a system. For L5X, the setting is true or false. For L5K, the setting is 1 (true) or 0
(false).
55
Chapter 2
For safety controllers, specify these attributes for the Controller component, in
addition to those previously described.
Controller attributes in a
safety controller system
Attribute
Description
SafetySignature
Specifies the safety signature control as defined in the controller properties. This value is exported only; it is ignored on import.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <SafetyInfo> tag element.
SafetyLocked
Displays whether the safety controller is locked or not. This value is exported only; it is ignored on import. This value will be Yes or No.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <SafetyInfo> tag element. Type true or false.
SafetyLockPassword
Specifies the lock password in the controller. This value is encrypted on export.
SafetyUnlockPassword
Specifies the unlock password in the controller. This value is encrypted on export.
SafetyTagMap
L5K only as an attribute. Specify the tags in the safety tag map. Place double quotes around the tags. Each entry must end with a comma
and carriage return. This is an example.
"StdTag1=SafeTag1,
StdTag2=SafTag2"
For L5X, a <SafetyTagMap> element is a subelement under the <SafeyInfo> element. Specify the tags in the safety tag map in the body
of the <SafetyTagMap> element Do not use quotes. Separate mappings with a comma and a space.
ConfigureSafetyIOAlways
Specify whether to configure safety I/O when replacing safety I/O. Type Yes or No.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <SafetyInfo> tag element. Type true or false.
SignatureRunModeProtect
Indicates whether you can modify the safety signature when in Run mode.
For L5X only, this attribute is on the <SafetyInfo> tag element.
Controller guidelines
56
Observe these guidelines when defining a controller:
All declarations must be ordered in the prescribed syntax.
The maximum number of tasks vary by the controller type.
Examples
Controller
Maximum Number of Tasks
ControlLogix
32
SoftLogix 5800
32
FlexLogix
CompactLogix
DriveLogix
There can be only one continuous task.
Programs can be scheduled under only one task.
There can be a maximum of 1000 programs under a task.
Scheduled programs must be defined.
Chapter 2
L5X Controller Example
57
Chapter 2
L5X Safety Controller Example
L5K CONTROLLER Example

CONTROLLER example_controller (Description := "controller
description",
ProcessorType := "1756-L73",
Major := 22,
TimeSlice := 20,
ShareUnusedTimeSlice := 1,
58
Chapter 2
RedundancyEnabled := 0,
KeepTestEditsOnSwitchOver := 0,
DataTablePadPercentage := 50,
SecurityCode := 0,
ChangesToDetect := 16#ffff_ffff_ffff_ffff,
SFCExecutionControl := "CurrentActive",
SFCRestartPosition := "MostRecent",
SFCLastScan := "DontScan",
SerialNumber := 16#0000_0000,
MatchProjectToController := No,
CanUseRPIFromProducer := No,
InhibitAutomaticFirmwareUpdate := 0,
PassThroughConfiguration := EnabledWithAppend,
DownloadProjectDocumentationAndExtendedProperties := Yes)
MODULE Local (Parent := "Local",
ParentModPortId := 1,
CatalogNumber := "1756-L73",
Vendor := 1,
ProductType := 14,
ProductCode := 94,
Major := 22,
Minor := 1,
PortLabel := "RxBACKPLANE",
ChassisSize := 7,
Slot := 0,
Mode := 2#0000_0000_0000_0001,
CompatibleModule := 0,
KeyMask := 2#0000_0000_0001_1111)
END_MODULE
TAG
END_TAG
PROGRAM MainProgram (MAIN := "MainRoutine",
MODE := 0, DisableFlag := 0)
TAG
END_TAG
ROUTINE MainRoutine
END_ROUTINE
END_PROGRAM
TASK MainTask (Type := CONTINUOUS,
Rate := 10, Priority := 10, Watchdog := 500,
DisableUpdateOutputs := No, InhibitTask := No)
MainProgram;
END_TASK
END_PARAMETER_CONNECTION
59
Chapter 2
CONFIG ASCII(XONXOFFEnable := 0,
DeleteMode := 0, EchoMode := 0,
TerminationChars := 65293, AppendChars := 2573,
BufferSize := 82)
END_CONFIG
CONFIG ControllerDevice END_CONFIG
CONFIG CST(SystemTimeMasterID := 0) END_CONFIG
CONFIG DF1(DuplicateDetection := 1,
ErrorDetection := BCC Error, EmbeddedResponseEnable := 0,
DF1Mode := Pt to Pt, ACKTimeout := 50,
NAKReceiveLimit := 3, ENQTransmitLimit := 3,
TransmitRetries := 3, StationAddress := 0,
ReplyMessageWait := 5, PollingMode := 1,
MasterMessageTransmit := 0, NormalPollNodeFile := "<NA>",
NormalPollGroupSize := 0, PriorityPollNodeFile := "<NA>",
ActiveStationFile := "<NA>", SlavePollTimeout := 3000,
EOTSuppression := 0, MaxStationAddress := 31,
TokenHoldFactor := 1, EnableStoreFwd := 0,
StoreFwdFile := "<NA>")
END_CONFIG
CONFIG FileManager END_CONFIG
CONFIG SerialPort(BaudRate := 19200,
Parity := No Parity, DataBits := 8 Bits of Data,
StopBits := 1 Stop Bit, ComDriverId := DF1,
PendingComDriverId := DF1, RTSOffDelay := 0,
RTSSendDelay := 0, ControlLine := No Handshake,
PendingControlLine := No Handshake,
RemoteModeChangeFlag := 0,
PendingRemoteModeChangeFlag := 0,
ModeChangeAttentionChar := 27,
PendingModeChangeAttentionChar := 27,
SystemModeCharacter := 83,
PendingSystemModeCharacter := 83,
UserModeCharacter := 85,
PendingUserModeCharacter := 85,
DCDWaitDelay := 0)
END_CONFIG
CONFIG WallClockTime(LocalTimeAdjustment := 0, TimeZone := 0)
CONFIG InternetProtocol [(Internet_Protocol_Attributes)]
END_ CONFIG
CONFIG EthernetPort1 [(Internet_Protocol_Attributes)]
60
Chapter 2
END_ CONFIG
CONFIG EthernetNetwork [(Ethernet_Network_Attributes)]
END_CONFIG
END_CONTROLLER
L5K Safety CONTROLLER Example
CONTROLLER example_safety_controller (Description := "Safety
Project",
ProcessorType := "1756-L73S",
Major := 22,
TimeSlice := 20,
ShareUnusedTimeSlice := 1,
RedundancyEnabled := 0,
KeepTestEditsOnSwitchOver := 0,
DataTablePadPercentage := 50,
SecurityCode := 0,
ChangesToDetect := 16#ffff_ffff_ffff_ffff,
SFCExecutionControl := "CurrentActive",
SFCRestartPosition := "MostRecent",
SFCLastScan := "DontScan",
SerialNumber := 16#0000_0000,
MatchProjectToController := No,
CanUseRPIFromProducer := No,
SafetyLocked := No,
SignatureRunModeProtect := No,
ConfigureSafetyIOAlways := No,
InhibitAutomaticFirmwareUpdate := 0,
PassThroughConfiguration := EnabledWithAppend,
DownloadProjectDocumentationAndExtendedProperties := Yes)
MODULE Local (Parent := "Local",
ParentModPortId := 1,
CatalogNumber := "1756-L73S",
Vendor := 1,
ProductType := 14,
ProductCode := 148,
Major := 22,
Minor := 1,
PortLabel := "RxBACKPLANE",
ChassisSize := 7,
Slot := 0,
Mode := 2#0000_0000_0000_0001,
KeyMask := 2#0000_0000_0001_1111,
SafetyNetwork := 16#0000_3c77_0315_5105)
END_MODULE
MODULE example_safety_controller:Partner
61
Chapter 2
(Parent := "Local", ParentModPortId := 1,

CatalogNumber := "1756-L7SP", Vendor := 1,
ProductType := 14, ProductCode := 146,
Major := 22, Minor := 1,
PortLabel := "RxBACKPLANE", Slot := 1,
Mode := 2#0000_0000_0000_0000,
KeyMask := 2#0000_0000_0001_1111,
SafetyNetwork := 16#0000_0000_0000_0000)
END_MODULE
TAG
END_TAG
PROGRAM MainProgram (Class := Standard,
MAIN := "MainRoutine", MODE := 0,
DisableFlag := 0)
TAG
END_TAG
ROUTINE MainRoutine
END_ROUTINE
END_PROGRAM
PROGRAM SafetyProgram (Class := Safety,
MAIN := "MainRoutine", MODE := 0,
DisableFlag := 0)
TAG
END_TAG
ROUTINE MainRoutine
END_ROUTINE
END_PROGRAM
Class := Standard, Rate := 10,
MainProgram;
END_TASK
TASK SafetyTask (Type := PERIODIC,
Class := Safety, Rate := 20,
SafetyProgram;
62
Chapter 2
END_TASK
CONFIG ASCII(XONXOFFEnable := 0,
DeleteMode := 0, EchoMode := 0,
TerminationChars := 65293,
AppendChars := 2573, BufferSize := 82)
END_CONFIG
CONFIG ControllerDevice END_CONFIG
CONFIG DF1(DuplicateDetection := 1,
ErrorDetection := BCC Error,
EmbeddedResponseEnable := 0,
DF1Mode := Pt to Pt, ACKTimeout := 50,
NAKReceiveLimit := 3, ENQTransmitLimit := 3,
TransmitRetries := 3, StationAddress := 0,
ReplyMessageWait := 5, PollingMode := 1,
MasterMessageTransmit := 0,
NormalPollNodeFile := "<NA>",
NormalPollGroupSize := 0,
PriorityPollNodeFile := "<NA>",
ActiveStationFile := "<NA>",
SlavePollTimeout := 3000, EOTSuppression := 0,
MaxStationAddress := 31, TokenHoldFactor := 1,
EnableStoreFwd := 0, StoreFwdFile := "<NA>")
END_CONFIG
CONFIG FileManager END_CONFIG
CONFIG SerialPort(BaudRate := 19200,
Parity := No Parity, DataBits := 8 Bits of Data,
StopBits := 1 Stop Bit, ComDriverId := DF1,
PendingComDriverId := DF1, RTSOffDelay := 0,
RTSSendDelay := 0, ControlLine := No Handshake,
PendingControlLine := No Handshake,
PendingRemoteModeChangeFlag := 0,
PendingModeChangeAttentionChar := 27,
PendingSystemModeCharacter := 83,
UserModeCharacter := 85,
PendingUserModeCharacter := 85, DCDWaitDelay := 0)
END_CONFIG
63
Chapter 2
CONFIG WallClockTime(LocalTimeAdjustment := 0,
TimeZone := 0)
CONFIG InternetProtocol [(Internet_Protocol_Attributes)]
END_ CONFIG
END_ CONFIG
CONFIG EthernetNetwork [(Ethernet_Network_Attributes)]
END_CONFIG
END_CONTROLLER
64
Chapter 3
Define a Datatype component
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the datatype component.
Datatype component
Datatype components define the data types used in the logic you export.
L5X datatype structure

<DataTypes>
<DataType [DataType_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<EngineeringUnit>
<![CDATA[ engineering_unit_text ]]>
</EngineeringUnit>
<Members>
[member_list]
</Members>
</Datatype
</DataTypes>
L5K datatype structure

DATATYPE <DataType_name> ([Description := "text",
EngineeringUnit := "text",
DataType_Attributes])
[member_definitions]
END_DATATYPE
Datatype elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
DataType_name
The name of the data type.

In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <DataType> element.
Description
Description
User information about the data type.
65
Chapter 3
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
EngineeringUnit
EngineeringUnit
(optional) User-specified description of the unit of the value, such as feet, gallons, and kilos.
Members
member_definitions
Defines the members of the data structure.
Datatype attributes
Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the data type.

In L5K, the name is an element of the data type statement.
Family (L5X)
FamilyType (L5K)
Specify StringFamily for a string data type.

Specify NoFamily for all other data types.
Class
L5X only. Type User.
Datatype member
There are two kinds of datatype members:
Bit membera member in which only a single bit of information is

accessed.
Nonbit membera member that is defined as another data type, such as

SINT, INT, DINT, and COUNTER.
L5X datatype member structure

<Members>
<Member [Member_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<EngineeringUnit>
<![CDATA[ engineeringunit_unit_text ]]>
</EngineeringUnit>
<State0>
<![CDATA[ state0_text ]]>
</State0>
<State1>
</State1>
</Member>
</Members>
66
Chapter 3
L5K datatype member structure

<TypeName> <MemberName> ([Description := "text",
State0 := "text",
State1 := "text",
Member_Attributes]);
A bit member uses this syntax:

BIT <BitName> <HostMemberName> : <BitPosition> [(Attributes)];
Datatype member elements

L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
TypeName
The name of the data type of the member.

In L5X, use a DataType attribute on the <Member> element.
N/A
MemberName
The name of the member.

In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Member> element.
Description
Description
User information about the member.
EngineeringUnit
EngineeringUnit
(optional) User-specified description of the unit of the value, such as feet, gallons, and kilos.
State0
State0
(optional) For Boolean member only. User-specified description of what the Zero state of the
Boolean value is.
State1
State1
(optional) For Boolean member only. User-specified description of what the One state of the
Boolean value is.
N/A
BitName
The name of the bit member.

In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Member> element.
N/A
HostMemberName
The hidden host member of bit members.

In L5X, use a Target attribute on the <Member> element.
N/A
BitPosition
The bit position in the hidden host member.

In L5X, use a BitNumber attribute on the <Member> element.
Datatype member attributes

Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the member.

In L5K, the member name is an element of the member statement.
Dimension
L5X only. Specify the dimensions of the member. Type 0 if atomic or a non-zero value for an array.
Radix
Specify decimal, hex, octal, binary, exponential, float, ASCII, or date/time.
Hidden
Specify if the member is a hidden member of the structure. Type 1 or 0 (or true or false for L5X)
67
Chapter 3
Attribute
Description
Target
The name of the hidden host member.
BitNumber
The bit position in the host member.
Max
(optional) User-specified maximum value for the member. Only valid for members with non-Boolean atomic datatypes.
Min
(optional) User-specified minimum value for the member. Only valid for members with non-Boolean atomic datatypes.
External Access
Specify the external access outside of the controller to the member. Specify Read/Write, Read Only, or None.
Bit members
All data types are allocated in 8-bit boundaries. A single bit of storage is not
allowed, so a member cannot be a BOOL data type. To access a single bit, use the
BIT declaration. BIT allows access to a single bit within a host member
(a non-bit member).
For example, create a user-defined datatype called MyBits and a tag called MyTag
of type MyBits
zzzzzzzzzzMyBits0 is the host member of MyBit0 and MyBit1.

The host member is normally a hidden member because only the bit references are
visible when you define a tag of the datatype.
68
Chapter 3
Bit members cannot be defined before their host members. Note that BitPosition
zero is the least significant bit.
This is the datatype syntax for this example in the L5K format.
DATATYPE MyBits (FamilyType := NoFamily)
SINT ZZZZZZZZZZMyBits0 (Hidden := 1);
BIT MyBit0 ZZZZZZZZZZMyBits0 : 0 (Radix := Binary);
BIT MyBit1 ZZZZZZZZZZMyBits0 : 1 (Radix := Binary);
END_DATATYPE
Important:
There must be a space between the host member name, colon, and the bit
position because type names can contain a colon (for example, I/O structures). The
space indicates where the type name ends.
This is the datatype syntax for this example in the L5X format.
Datatype guidelines
Observe these guidelines when defining a datatype:
Datatypes must be defined first within the controller body.
Datatypes can be defined out of order. For example, if Type1 depends on

Type2, Type2 can be defined first.
Datatypes can be unverified. For example if Type1 depends on Type2 and

Type2 is never defined, then Type1 will be accessible as an unverified type.
Type2 will be typeless type. Tags of Type1 may be created but not of Type2.
Datatype members can be arrays but only one dimension is allowed.
These datatypes cannot be used in a user-defined datatype:
69
Chapter 3
Examples
ALARM_ANALOG
ALARM_DIGITAL
AXIS types
COORDINATE_SYSTEM
MOTION_GROUP
MESSAGE
MODULE
If one user-defined datatype references a second user-defined data type

defined in the file, the second user-defined datatype appears before the first
one in the import/export file.
L5X DataType example
L5K DATATYPE example

DATATYPE MyStructure (FamilyType := NoFamily)
DINT x;
TIMER y[3] (Radix := Decimal);
SINT MyFlags (Hidden :=1);
BIT aBit0 MyFlags : 0 (Radix := Binary);
BIT aBit1 MyFlags : 1 (Radix := Binary);
END_DATATYPE
70
Chapter 4
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the module component.
Module component
A module component defines any modules used by logic you export. For example,
the module component can contain I/O modules referenced by I/O tags, modules
accessed by GSV/SSV instructions, or controllers referenced in consumed tags.
L5X module structure

<Modules>
<Module [Module_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<EKey [Ekey_Attributes]/>
<Ports>
<Port [Port_Attributes]
<Bus [Bus_Attributes]/>
</Port>
</Ports>
<Communications [Communications_Attributes]>
<ConfigTag [ConfigTag_Attributes]>
[data]
</ConfigTag>
<ConfigScript [ConfigScript_Attributes]>
[data]
</ConfigScript>
[connections]
</Communications>
<ExtendedProperties
[ExtendedProperties_Attributes]>
[extendedpropertiesdata]
</ExtendedProperties>
</Module>
</Modules>
L5K MODULE structure

MODULE <device_name> [(Description := "text",
71
Chapter 4
Module_Attributes)]
[ConfigData := <initial_value>;]
[ConfigScript:=<initial_value>;]
[ExtendedProp := <text>]
[connection_list]
END_MODULE
Module elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
device_name
The name of the module.

In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Module> element.
Description
Description
User information about the module.
EKey
N/A
Keying information for the module.

In L5K, this information is in the CompatibleModule and KeyMask attributes on the
MODULE.
Ports
N/A
Port information for the module, which is the physical connector for the module that
attaches the module to the bus. Each module has at least one port.
ConfigTag or ConfigData
ConfigData
Operating characteristics of the module.

In L5X, the data for the tag is defined with <Data> elements. See Chapter 1 Data Formats
on page 41 for more information.
ExtendedProperties
ExtendedProp
Additional profile data stored in the controller in an XML format.
connections
connection_list
(zero or more CONNECTION entries)
Connection characteristics for the module.
Module attributes
Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the module.

In L5K the name is an element of the statement.
Parent
L5K only. If this module is a child to another module, specify the name of the parent module. The parent module must be defined
before any child module.
ParentModule
L5X only. If this module is a child to another module, specify the name of the parent module. The parent module must be defined
before any child module.
ParentModPortID (L5K)
ParentModPortID (L5X)
If this module is a child to another module, specify the number of the port on the parent module that connects to this child module.
The parent module must be defined before any child module.
CatalogNumber
Specify the catalog number of the module.
72
Attribute
Description
Vendor
Specify the vendor of the module. A number 1 indicates Allen-Bradley.
Chapter 4
For L5X, this attribute is on the <EKey> element if the State attribute has a value of Custom.
ProductType
Specify the product type of the module.

ProductCode
Specify the product code of the module.

Major
Specify the major revision number (1...127) of the module.
Minor
Specify the minor revision number (1...255) of the module.
For L5X this attribute is on the <EKey> element if the State attribute has a value of Custom.
UserDefinedVendor
Specify the vendor of a non-Allen-Bradley module. Type a number to indicate the vendor.
UserDefinedProductType
Specify the product type of a non-Allen-Bradley module.
UserDefinedProductCode
Specify the product code of a non-Allen-Bradley module.
UserDefinedMajor
Specify the major revision number (1...127) of a non-Allen-Bradley module.
UserDefinedMinor
Specify the minor revision number (1...255) of a non-Allen-Bradley module.
PortLabel
L5K only. Specify the port used to reach this module. The port label is either RxBACKPLANE for modules in a chassis or a text string for
modules on a network.
ChassisSize
L5K only. Specify the number of slots in the chassis.

For L5X, use the Size attribute on the <Bus> element.
Slot
L5K only. Specify the slot number where the module is in the chassis.
For L5X, use the Address attribute on the <Port> element.
NodeAddress
L5K only. Specify the node address (1...99) on the network with the Ethernet IP address or host name).
For L5X, use the Address attribute on the <Port> element.
Group
L5K only. If the module is a remote I/O module, specify the starting group (0...7). For a block-transfer module, this is the module group
number under the remote I/O adapter.
CommMethod
Specify the method of connecting to the module.

For L5X, this attribute is on the <Communications> element.
ConfigMethod
Specify the method of configuring the module.
Mode
Select a specific mode by setting the appropriate bit.

Set:
For:
Do not inhibit the module and a fault in the module does not cause a major fault in the controller
Fault in the module causes a major fault in the controller
Inhibit the module
Both inhibit the module and a fault in the module causes a major fault in the controller
73
Chapter 4
Attribute
Description
CompatibleModule
L5K only. Specify whether to connect to a compatible module based on the minor revision (value = 1) or an exact match or disabled
keying of the module (value = 0).
If you specify exact for KeyMask, set CompatibleModule to 0.
If you specify compatible for KeyMask, set CompatibleModule to 1.
KeyMask
L5K only. Specify whether to connect to the exact module that matches the electronic keying information of vendor, product code,
product type, major revision, and minor revision. No keying will connect to any module.
Specify
To:
2#0000_0000_0000_0000
Disable keying
2#0000_0000_0001_1111
Require a replacement module to be compatible
2#0000_0000_0001_1111
Require a replacement module to be an exact match
The values for compatible module and for exact match are the same because this attribute is used in conjunction with
CompatibleModule to distinguish between compatible module or exact match.
State
L5X only. This attribute is on the <EKey> element. Type CompatibleModule, ExactMatch, Disabled, or Custom.
PrimCxnInputSize
Specify the size of the input data associated with the primary connection (0...500 bytes).
PrimCxnOutputSize
Specify the size of the output data associated with the primary connection (0...496 bytes).
SecCxnInputSize
Specify the size of the input data associated with the secondary connection (0...500 bytes). Typically, there is one I/O connection on a
module (primary connection). If there are two, the second connection is the secondary connection.
SecCxnOutputSize
Specify the size of the output data associated with the secondary connection (0...496 bytes). Typically, there is one I/O connection on a
module that is the primary connection. If there are two, the second connection is the secondary connection.
ChABaud
L5K only. For a 1756-DHRIO module, specify the baud rate for channel A. Type 57.6, 115.2, or 230.4.
For L5X, use the Baud attribute on the <Bus> element.
ChBBaud
L5K only. For a 1756-DHRIO module, specify the baud rate for channel B. Type 57.6, 115.2, or 230.4.
For L5X, use the Baud attribute on the <BusControlNet> elemEtherNet/IPent.
DtlsFileName
Specify the file name associated with a DriveExecutive project. DriveExecutive configures drives on ControlNet and EtherNet/IP
networks.
ConfigCode
Specify the value that represents the drive rating of the drive. Select this rating on the Power tab in a DriveExecutive project for drives
on ControlNet and EtherNet/IPnetworks.
ControlNetSignature
This value (hexadecimal) is exported only for the purpose of doing a file compare. This value is ignored on import.
SafetyNetwork
If the module is in a safety controller system, specify the 6-byte hexadecimal number of the safety network.
SafetyEnabled
A flag only in modules that can be configured as safety or standard. Type true if the module is a safety module.
RSNetWorxFileName
L5K only. Specify the file name of an associated RSNetWorx project file.
Inhibited
L5X only. If the module is inhibited, type true. If the module is not inhibited, type false.
74
Chapter 4
Attribute
Description
MajorFault
L5X only. Specify if the controller generates a major fault if the connection to the module is lost in run mode (true or false).
ConfigSize
L5X only. This attribute is on the <ConfigTag> or <ConfigData> element. Specify the size of the Config Tag or Config Data.
Id
L5X only. This attribute is on the <Port> element. It uniquely identifies the port.
Address
L5X only. This attribute is on the <Port> element. Specify the node number, slot number, or IP address/host name.
Type
L5X only. This attribute is on the <Port> element. Defines the type of the module
Upstream
L5X only. This attribute is on the <Port> element. It is determined by the I/O topology of the module. Specify true for Upstream or
false for downstream.
NATActualAddress
The IP address of a safety I/O module or controller specified by the user as the actual address on the network of the module.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <Port> element.
ConnectorOffset
L5X only. This attribute is on the <Port> element.
Width
L5X only. This attribute is on the <Port> element.
Size
L5X only. This attribute is on the <Bus> element. For a sizable chassis, specify the chassis size.
In L5K, this attribute is the ChassisSize attribute on the MODULE.
Baud
L5X only. This attribute is on the <Bus> element. Specify the baud rate (57.6, 115.2, or 230.4).
In L5K, this attribute is the ChABaud or ChBBaud attribute on the MODULE.
ShutdownParentOnFault
Indicates the parent device is shut down when this module faults.
DrivesADCMode
Sets or clears the Drives ADC mode bit.

Setting to true on a non-ADC causes the drive to fail.
DrivesADCEnabled
Indicates that Automatic Device Configuration is enabled for this device.

Can be set true only when the DrivesADCMode is set true.
UserDefinedCatalogNumber
Used to persist the Catalog Number for drive peripherals.

You do not have to modify this value.
Constant
Specify whether the value is a constant value or a dynamic value. For L5K, specify yes for a constant value or no for a dynamic value.
For L5X, specify true or false.
PermissionSet
Module attributes in a
safety controller system
In a safety controller system, the module component for the safety partner follows
the module component for the primary safety controller. All of the attributes of
the safety partner are determined based on those of the primary safety controller.
The module component for the primary safety controller follows the structure
previously described. The safety partner module uses these attributes:
75
Chapter 4
Parent
PortLabel
ParentModPortID
Slot
CatalogNumber (1756-LSP)
CompatibleModule
Vendor
Key
ProductType
Mask
ProductCode
SafetyNetwork
Major
SafetyEnabled
Minor
NATActualAddress
Mode
Module connection
L5X connection structure

<Connections>
<Connection [Connection_Attributes]>
<InputTag>
data
</InputTag>
<OutputTag>
data
</OututTag>
</Connection>
<RackConnection [RackConnection_Attributes]>
<InAliasTag>
data
</InAliasTag>
<OutAliasTag>
data
</OutAliasTag>
</RackConnection>
</Connections>
L5K CONNECTION structure

CONNECTION <connection_name> [(Connection_Attributes)]
[InputData := <value_list>;]
[InputForceData := <value_list>;]
[OutputData := <value_list>;]
[OutputForceData := <value_list>;]
END_CONNECTION
76
Chapter 4
Connection elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
connection_name
The name of the connection.

In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Connection> element.
InputTag or InputData
InputData
Input channel data.

In L5X, the data for the input tag is defined with <Data> elements. See Chapter 1 Data
Formats on page 41 for more information.
InputTag or InputData
InputForceData
Forcing information for the input channel.

In L5X, the force data for the input tag is defined with <ForceData> elements. See Chapter
1 Data Formats on page 41 for more information.
OutputTag or OutputData
OutputData
Output channel data.

In L5X, the data for the output tag is defined with <Data> elements. See Chapter 1, Data
Formats on page 41 for more information.
OutputTag or OutputData
OutputForceData
Forcing information for the output channel.

In L5X, the force data for the output tag is defined with <ForceData> elements. See Chapter
1 Data Formats on page 41 for more information.
For details on the data in the connection list, see the user manual for the I/O
module. The connection list data depends on the I/O module and the
configuration for that module.
In L5K format, forces appear as arrays of bytes under the InputForceData and
OutputForceData attributes of the connection list. In L5X format, forces appear
as arrays of bytes under the <ForceData> elements in the <InputTag> and
<OutputTag> elements.
Important:
Do not modify forces in the import/export file. Use the programming

software to enter and enable forces.
Module connection attributes

Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the connection.

In L5K, the name is an element of the statement.
Rate
L5K only. Specify the requested packet interval (RPI) rate in microseconds.
RPI
L5X only. Specify the requested packet interval rate in microseconds.
InputCxnPoint
Specify the input connection point for the primary connection (0...255).
77
Chapter 4
Attribute
Description
InputSize
Specify the input size (0...255).
OutputCxnPoint
Specify the output connection point for the primary connection (0...255).
OutputSize
Specify the output size (0...255).
Unicast
Specify if the EtherNet/IP connection is unicast. For L5K, specify yes for unicast or no to remain multicast.
For L5X, specify true or false.
On export, only appears if the path to the unicast supported I/O module crosses an EtherNet/IP network.
EventID
Specify the event ID if used in conjunction with an event task.
ControlNetScheduled
Specify how the connection is scheduled. Specify yes to schedule over ControlNet or no to connect
unscheduled. This attribute is only used if the path from the module to the controller uses ControlNet. For
L5X format specify true or false.
Type
L5X only. Specify the type of connection: Input, Output, MotionSync, MotionAsync, MotionEvent,
SafetyInput, or SafetyOutput.
Priority
Indicates the rank of the input production.
InputConnectionType
Indicates the type of input production.
Valid values = Scheduled (default) or High.
Valid values = Multicast (default) or Unicast.

OutputRedundantOwner
Indicates if the output production is a redundant owner.
InputProductionTrigger
Indicates the input production trigger.

Valid values = Cyclic, COS, or Application.
ConnectionPath
Indicates the target connection path.
InputTagSuffix
Identifies the suffix for the Input Tag.
OutputTagSuffix
Identifies the suffix for the Output Tag
Constant
Specify whether the value for an Input or an Output parameter is a constant value or it can change. For
L5K, specify yes for a constant value or no for a dynamic value. For L5X, specify true or false.
PermissionSet
Name of the set of permissions, configured in FactoryTalk Security, to apply to this Input/Output Tag.
Module connection attributes in a safety controller system

A module connection in a safety controller system has these attributes, in addition
to the module connection attributes previously described.
Attribute
Description
TimeoutMultiplier
Specify the timeout multiplier (default = 2) for a safety controller system. This value determines the RPIs of time to wait
for a packet before declaring a time out. This translates into the number of messages that may be lost before declaring a
connection error. A Timeout Multiplier of 1 indicates that no messages may be lost; that is, there must be a packet every
RPI. A Timeout Multiplier of 2 indicates that 1 message may be lost; that is, as long as a packet is seen in 2 times the RPI,
no time-out will occur. Type a number from 1...4.
78
Chapter 4
Attribute
Description
NetworkDelayMultiplier
Specify the network delay multiplier (default = 100%) for a safety controller control system. This value lets you reduce
or increase the connection reaction time limit in cases where the transport time of the message is significantly less or
more than the RPI. This may be the case when the RPI of an output connection is the same as a lengthy task period. Type
a percentage from 10...600.
ReactionTimeLimit
Specify the connection reaction time limit (0...5500032) for a safety controller system. The Logix Designer application
calculates the connection reaction time limit as a function of the RPI, timeout multiplier, and network delay multiplier.
The connection reaction time limit is automatically recalculated if any of the values change.
MaxObservedNetworkDelay
L5X only. The MaxObservedNetworkDelay is a measure of the longest time data for a safety connection is delayed from
transporting the safety packets over the network. This attribute is exported for informational purposes only and is
ignored on import.
Module guidelines
Observe these guidelines when defining a module.
Attributes can be in any order. They export in the order defined.
A parent module must be defined before any definitions of its

child modules.
Examples
79
Chapter 4
L5X module example
80
Chapter 4
81
Chapter 4
82
Chapter 4
L5X Safety Partner Module Example
83
Chapter 4
L5K MODULE example
84
Chapter 4
L5K Safety Partner MODULE example
85
Chapter 5
Define an Add-On Instruction component
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the Add-On Instruction component.
Add-On Instruction
component
An Add-On Instruction component defines an Add-On Instruction.

Important:
The EditedDate attribute of an Add-On Instruction must be updated if the

Add-On Instruction is modified by editing an .L5K or .L5X file.
When you change an Add-On Instruction by manually editing an .L5X file
using a text editor and you do not change the EditedDate attribute, the
application does not overwrite the Add-On Instruction when you import
the file.
L5X AddOnInstructionDefinition Structure

<AddOnInstructionDefinition
[AddOnInstructionDefinition_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<AdditionalHelpText>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</AdditionalHelpText>
<SignatureHistory>
[history]
</SignatureHistory>
<Parameters>
[parameter]
</Parameters>
<LocalTags>
[local_tag]
</LocalTags>
<Routines>
[routine]
</Routine>
<ScanModeRoutine>
[routine]
</ScanModeRoutine>
87
Chapter 5
</AddOnInstructionDefintion>
</AddOnInstructionDefinitions>
L5K ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION structure

ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION <name>
[(Description := "text", Attributes)]
[<HISTORY_ENTRY declaration>]
[<PARAMETERS declaration>]
[<LOCAL_TAGS declaration>]
[<add_on_instruction_routines]
[<scan_mode_routine>]
END_ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION
Add-On Instruction elements

L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
name
In L5K, the name of the Add-On Instruction.
Description
Description
User information about the Add-On Instruction (128 characters maximum).
SignatureHistory
HISTORY_ENTRY
Optional element for a sealed Add-On Instruction.
AdditionalHelpText
N/A
In L5K, use the AdditonalHelpText attribute.
In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <AddOnInstructionDefinition> element.
For L5X, specify help text for the user help on the Add-On Instruction.
Parameters
PARAMETERS
Parameters of the Add-On Instruction.
LocalTags
LOCAL_TAGS
Local tags of the Add-On Instruction.
Routines
add_on_instruction_
routines
Logic that comprises the Add-On Instruction. Logic can be relay ladder, function block, or
structured text.
ScanModeRoutine
SCAN_MODE_ROUTINE
Optional element that has the logic for a Prescan routine, Postscan routine, or EnableInFalse
routine.
Add-On Instruction attributes

Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the Add-On Instruction component.

Class
Specify the class of the Add-On Instruction. This attribute applies only to safety projects. Type Standard or Safety.
88
Chapter 5
Attribute
Description
Revision
Specify the revision of the Add-On Instruction, in the form of MajorRevision.MinorRevision. Each revision number can be
1...65,535. If there is no period, the number is treated as a major revision only.
RevisionExtension
Provide additional information about the revision (40 characters maximum).
RevisionNote
Provide information about the revision (128 characters maximum).
Vendor
Specify the name of the vendor (40 characters maximum) of the Add-On Instruction.
ExecutePrescan
Specify whether to execute the Prescan routine after the Logic is prescanned. Type 1 for yes; type 0 for no. The default is
1 if a Prescan routine exists.
ExecutePostscan
Specify whether to execute the Postscan routine after the Logic is postscanned. Type 1 for yes; type 0 for no. The default
is 1 if a Postscan routine exists.
ExecuteEnableInFalse
Specify whether to execute the EnableInFalse routine when enable is false. Type 1 for yes; type 0 for no. The default is 1
if an EnableInFalse routine exists.
CreatedDate
Specify the date the Add-On Instruction was created.
CreatedBy
Specify the developer that created the Add-On Instruction.
EditedDate
Specify the date the Add-On Instruction was last edited.
EditedBy
Specify the developer that edited the Add-On Instruction.
SoftwareRevision
Specify the revision of the application last used to edit the Add-On Instruction. The default is the currently open version
of the application.
AdditionalHelpText
Specify help text specific to the Add-On Instruction.
PermissionSet
Routines in Add-On Instructions

Enter routines in an Add-On Instruction the same as logic routines. The logic in a
single routine must all be in the same programming language, but each routine can
be in a different programming language. Program the routines in ladder logic
(ROUTINE), function block (FBD_ROUTINE), or structured text
(ST_ROUTINE) languages. The Add-On Instruction has predefined routine
names that you must use and cannot change.
Routine Name
Description
Logic
Defines the logic for the Add-On Instruction.

At the minimum, every Add-On Instruction must have a Logic routine.
Prescan
Defines logic to execute during prescan.
Postscan
Defines logic to execute during postscan.
EnableInFalse
Defines logic to execute when EnableIn is false.
For example, this structure for an Add-On Instruction uses all four routines.
ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION Example (attributes)
PARAMETERS
89
Chapter 5
add_on_instruction_parameters
END_PARAMETERS
LOCAL_TAGS
add_on_instruction_local_tags
END_LOCAL_TAGS
FBD_ROUTINE Logic (attributes)
function_block_routine_logic
END_FBD_ROUTINE
ST_ROUTINE Prescan (attributes)
structured_text_routine_logic
END_ST_ROUTINE
ROUTINE Postscan (attributes)
ladder_logic_routine_logic
END_ROUTINE
FBD_ROUTINE EnableInFalse (attributes)
function_block_routine_logic
END_FBD_ROUTINE
If a tag in an Add-On Instruction references a second Add-On Instruction whose

definition is also present in the file, the referenced Add-On Instruction definition
must appear before the first one in the import/export file.
Parameters
The parameter component defines Input, Output, and InOut type parameters in
the Add-On Instruction. For L5X format, the default data for the local tag is
defined with a <DefaultData>. The <DefaultData> element is defined the same
as a <Data> element. See Chapter 1 Data Formats on page 41 for more
information on the <Data> element format.
The system defined EnableIn input parameter and EnableOut output parameter
are defined in the export format so the description may be modified in a .L5K or
.L5X format file. The rest of the attributes for the EnableIn and EnableOut
parameters that are system defined will be ignored by import even though they are
present in the import file.
L5X parameters structure

<Parameters>
<Parameter [Parameter_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]] >
</Description>
90
Chapter 5
<Comments>
<Comment Operand="specifier">
<![CDATA[ comment_text ]]>
</Comment>
</Comments>
<EngineeringUnits>
<EngineeringUnit Operand="specifier">
</EngineeringUnit>
</EngineeringUnits>
<Mins>
<Min Operand="specifier"> min_value </Min>
</Mins>
<Maxes>
<Max Operand="specifier"> max_value </Max>
</Maxes>
<State0s>
<State0 Operand="specifier">
</State0>
</State0s>
<State1s>
</State1>
</State1s>
<DefaultData [DefaultData_Attributes]>
data
</DefaultData>
</Parameter>
</Parameters>
L5K parameters structure

PARAMETERS
<name> : <datatype[array_specification]>[(Description :=
"text",
Comment := "text",
Max := value,
Min := value,
State0 := "text",
State1 := "text",
Parameter_Attributes)];
END_PARAMETERS
91
Chapter 5
Parameter elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
name
The name of the parameter.

In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Parameter> element.
N/A
datatype
Data type of the parameter.

InOut parameters can be atomic (SINT, INT, DINT, and REAL) and compound (user-defined
and array) data types. Input and Output parameters can be only atomic (SINT, INT, DINT, and
REAL) data types.
N/A
array_specification
In L5X, use a DataType attribute on the <Parameter> element.

Dimensional boundaries for an InOut parameter array.
In L5X, use a Dimensions attribute on the <Parameter> element.
Description
Description
User information about the parameter with a 128-character maximum.
DefaultData
N/A
The default data values for Input parameters or Output parameters.

In L5K, use a DefaultData attribute.
Comment
Comment
(optional) User information about specified sub-regions of the parameter.

Can specify Comment<specifier>
Where the specifier is:
.bitnumber - for a bit in the parameter
[element] - for an array element of the parameter
.membername - for a structure member of the parameter
There can be multiple comment elements.
EngineeringUnit
EngineeringUnit
(optional) User specified description of what the unit of the value is (that is, feet, gallons,
kilos).
Can specify EngineeringUnit <specifier>
There can be multiple engineering unit elements.
Max
Max
(optional) User specified maximum value about qualified sub-regions of the parameter.
Only valid for a parameters sub-regions, which is a non-Boolean atomic datatypes.
Can specify Max <specifier>
There can be multiple max elements.
92
Chapter 5
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
Min
Min
(optional) User specified minimum value about qualified sub-regions of the parameter. Only
valid for a parameters sub-regions, which is a non-Boolean atomic datatypes.
Can specify Min <specifier>
There can be multiple min elements.
State0
State0
(optional) for Boolean parameters or sub-regions only. User specified description of what
the Zero state of the Boolean value is.
Can specify State0 <specifier>
There can be multiple state0 elements.
State1
State1
(optional) for Boolean parameters or sub-regions only. User specified description of what
the One state of the Boolean value is.
Can specify State1 <specifier>
Parameters attributes
Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the parameter.

DataType
L5X only. Specify the datatype of the parameter.

InOut parameters can be atomic (SINT, INT, DINT, and REAL) , compound (user-defined and array) data types object
backed (MESSAGE, ALARM, etc.). Input and Output parameters can be only atomic (SINT, INT, DINT, and REAL) data
types.
In L5K, the datatype is an element of the statement.
TagType
L5X only. Specify Base or Alias.
93
Chapter 5
Attribute
Description
AliasFor
L5X only. Name of the base tag that the alias parameter references.
Specify LocaTag<specifier>
Where the specifier is a bit (.bitnumber), array element ([element]), or structure member (.membername) of the tag, or
any combination such as [7].Input.0.
Dimensions
L5X only. Specify the dimensions of the datatype.

In L5K, the dimensions are an element of the statement.
Usage
Specify the type of parameter. Type Input, Output, or InOut.
Radix
Specify decimal, hex, octal, binary, exponential, float, ASCII.
Required
Specify whether the parameter is required. Type 1 if the parameter is required; type 0 if the parameter is optional.
Constant
Specify whether the value for an Input or an Output parameter is a constant value or it can change. For L5K, specify yes
for a constant value or no for a dynamic value. For L5X, specify true or false.
ExternalAccess
Specify the external access, outside of the controller, to the parameter. Specify Read/Write, Read Only, or None.
Max
(optional) User specified maximum value for the parameter. Only valid for parameter with non-Boolean atomic
datatype.
Min
(optional) User specified minimum value for the parameter. Only valid for parameter with non-Boolean atomic datatype.
Visible
Specify whether the parameter is visible on the display for the instructions. Type 1 if the parameter is visible; type 0 if
the parameter is not visible.
DefaultData
L5K only. Specify a default value for the parameter. This attribute is not available if you specify Usage as InOut.
In L5X, the parameter default data is an element of the L5X structure.
Signature history
The Signature History stores history entries for an Add-On Instruction. There
can be 06 entries that are exported in the order they are created. The order in
the file is used during import to store them. If you edit the file manually, that
order is maintained.
L5K fileThe Signature History is stored in the HISTORY_ENTRY

structure.
L5X fileThe Signature History is stored in the <SignatureHistory>

structure.
When an Add-On Instruction is sealed, the Signature History is protected and

hidden in the ENCODED_DATA section. See Encoded/UnencodedAdd-On
Instructions on page 97.
94
L5K fileThe ENCODED_DATA section is a separate section.
L5X fileThe <EncodedData> section is an element of

<AddOnInstructionDefinitions>.
Chapter 5
L5X SignatureHistory structure

<SignatureHistory>
<HistoryEntry [HistoryEntry_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]] >
</Description>
</HistoryEntry>
</SignatureHistory>
L5K HISTORY_ENTRY structure

HISTORY_ENTRY [History_Entry_Attributes)]
END_HISTORY_ENTRY
History entry attributes

Attribute
Description
User
Specifies the identity of the user that created the entry.
Timestamp
Specifies the timestamp when the entry was created. The value is a UTC date time, such as 2009-04-01T12:08:00.000Z.
SignatureID
Specifies the signature ID for the Add-On Instruction when the entry was created. The value is an 8-digit uppercase hex number, such as 8F44EBA3.
Description
User information about the parameter (128 characters maximum).
Local tags
The local tags component defines local tags in the Add-On Instruction. The L5K
format for defining a local tag is the same format for defining a tag in a program or
at controller scope For more details on defining a tag, see Chapter 6 Defining a
Tag Component on page 107. For L5X format, you specify the default data for the
local tag with a <DefaultData> element. Define the <DefaultData> element the
same as a <Data> element. See Chapter 1 Data Formats on page 41 for more
information on the <Data> element format.
L5X LocalTags structure

<LocalTags>
<LocalTag [LocalTag_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]] >
</Description>
<Comments>
95
Chapter 5
</Comment>
</Comments>
<EngineeringUnits>
</EngineeringUnit>
</EngineeringUnits>
<Mins>
</Mins>
<Maxes>
</Maxes>
<State0s>
</State0>
</State0s>
<State1s>
</State1>
</State1s>
<DefaultData [DefaultData_Attributes]>
data
</DefaultData>
</LocalTag>
</LocalTags>
L5K LOCAL_TAGS structure

LOCAL_TAGS
tag_declaration
END_LOCAL_TAGS
Local tag attributes

Specify these attributes for local tags in L5X format. See Chapter 6 Defining a Tag
Component on page 107 for attributes for local tags in L5K format.
Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the local tag.

96
Chapter 5
Attribute
Description
DataType
L5X only. Specify the datatype of the local tag.

Local tags can be atomic (SINT, INT, DINT, and REAL) and compound (for example, user-defined, add-on instruction
defined, array) data types. Local tags cannot be object backed data types (for example, MESSAGE, ALARM).
In L5K, the datatype is an element of the statement.
Dimensions
L5X only. Specify the dimensions of the datatype.

In L5K, the dimensions are an element of the statement.
Radix
Specify decimal, hex, octal, binary, exponential, float, ASCII.
ExternalAccess
Specify the external access, outside of the controller, to the local tag. Specify Read/Write, Read Only, or None.
Max
(optional) User specified maximum value for the local tag. Only valid for local tag with non-Boolean atomic datatype.
Min
(optional) User specified minimum value for the local tag. Only valid for local tag with non-Boolean atomic datatype.
DefaultData
L5K only. Specify a default value for the local tag.

In L5X, the parameter default data is an element of the L5X structure.
Encoded/Unencoded AddOn Instructions
These examples are for protected (encoded) and unprotected (clear text) codes for
Add-On Instructions.
If the project contains high-integrity Add-On Instructions, those Add-On
Instructions always appear as encoded data components when you export
the project.
See Exporting Source-protected Logic on page 28 on page 33 for procedures.
L5X EncodedData Structure

<EncodedData EncodedType= "type", Name="name",
Type="routinetype"
[,other_attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]] >
</Description>
encoded_data
</EncodedData>
L5K ENCODED_DATA Structure

ENCODED_DATA [( EncodedType: type, Name:= name,
Type:= routinetype,
other_attributes)]
encoded_data
END_ENCODED_DATA
97
Chapter 5
Encoded data attributes

L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
type
type
The type of data encoded.

In L5K, specify ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION
In L5X, specify AddOnInstructionDefinition
name
name
The name of the protected Add-On Instruction.
SignatureID
SignatureID
32-bit value based upon the current configuration of the Add-On-Instruction.
SignatureTimestamp
SignatureTimestamp
The time and date that the Add-On-Instruction was sealed.
SafetySignatureID
SafetySignatureID
Only applies to Safety Add-On-Instructions. Additional safety ID calculated online in the

safety system.
N/A
other_attributes
Attributes of the Add-On Instruction that are not protected during export.
N/A
encoded_data
The protected portion of the Add-On Instruction.
Important:
98
When the Add-On Instruction is source-protected, the encoded_data information is encrypted. If you
modify this encrypted information, you cannot re-import the Add-On Instruction.
Chapter 5
L5X Encoded Add-On Instruction example
99
Chapter 5
L5K Encoded Add-On instruction example

ENCODED_DATA (EncodedType := ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION,
Name := "Conveyor_Control",
Description := "This is the description",
Revision := "1.0",
RevisionNote := "This is a Revision Note",
Vendor := "vendor",
SignatureID := AC2CCC57,
SignatureTimestamp := "2014-05-20T14:04:14.807Z",
EditedDate := "2014-05-20T14:04:14.807Z",
AdditionalHelpText := "This is help text",
EncryptionConfig := 3)
HISTORY_ENTRY (User := RA-INT\JBieder2,
Timestamp := "2014-05-20T00:15:08.867Z",
SignatureID := 16#52db_eb8a,
Description := "History description")
END_HISTORY_ENTRY
PARAMETERS
EnableIn : BOOL (Description := "Enable Input System Defined Parameter",
Usage := Input,
RADIX := Decimal
Required := No,
Visible := No,
ExternalAccess := Read Only);
EnableOut : BOOL (Description := "Enable Output System Defined Parameter",
Usage := Output,
RADIX := Decimal,
Required := No,
Visible := No,
ExternalAccess := Read
Only);
END_PARAMETERS
5PC4UUeSPrD8+QMe30neT5/97J+VmK95qgOApHiZ7VpmkuGyeYVmzDm3
ceYND35YMmzC4xyFQfJYld
END_ENCODED_DATA
Add-On Instruction
Guidelines
100
Use these Add-On Instruction guidelines with function blocks:
If the operand is not a qualified tag or literal value, the Add-On Instruction
is not verified.
The X and Y grid locations are a relative position from the upper-left corner
of the sheet. X is the horizontal position; Y is the vertical position.
Chapter 5
L5X unencoded AddOnInstruction definition example

This L5X file shows a definition partial export example for an L5X Add-On
Instruction.
101
Chapter 5
Add-On Instruction Example, Continued
L5K unencoded ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION _DEFINITION example

ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION Valve (Description := "Simple
valve control",
Revision := 1.0, RevisionExtension := B,
Vendor := RaesUDICreationsUnlimited,
ExecutePrescan := Yes,
ExecutePostscan := No, ExecuteEnableInFalse :=
No,
CreatedBy := apollo\drjones, EditedDate :=
2005-01-05T15:24:59.188Z,
EditedBy := apollo\drjones,
AdditionalHelpText := My first Add-On
Instruction how cool!)
PARAMETERS
Valve_Command : BOOL (Description := 0 - Close
valve$N1 - Open valve,
Radix := Decimal, Required := Yes, Visible :=
Yes, DefaultData := 1);
102
Chapter 5
Array_Parameter : REAL[5] (Type := InOut, Radix

:= Float, Required := Yes,
Visible := Yes); Valve_Out : DINT (Type :=
Output, Radix := Decimal,
Required := No, Visible := Yes, DefaultData :=
0);
Reset : BOOL (Description := Used by Prescan
routine to run Reset code,
Type := Input, Radix := Decimal, Required := No,
Visible := No,
DefaultData := 1);
END_PARAMETERS
LOCAL_TAGS
Valve_Type : DISCRETE_2STATE (Description := The
valve is a 2 state valve,
DefaultData :=
[49,0.00000000e+000,0,0,0.00000000e+000,0.00000000e+000,
0.00000000e+000,0.00000000e+000,0.00000000e+000,0.000000
00e+000]);
END_LOCAL_TAGS
FBD_ROUTINE Logic (Description := "This UDI Logic
routine is nonsense but shows the
format sufficiently. In fact, it does not even use the
InOut Parameter",
SheetSize := "Letter (8.5x11in)",
SheetOrientation := Landscape)
SHEET (Name := "")
D2SD_BLOCK (ID := 0, X := 200, Y := 160,
Operand := Valve_Type,
VisiblePins := "ProgCommand,
State0Perm, State1Perm, FB0, FB1,
HandFB, ProgProgReq, ProgOperReq,
ProgOverrideReq, ProgHandReq,
Out, Device0State, Device1State,
CommandStatus, FaultAlarm,
ModeAlarm, ProgOper, Override,
Hand")
END_D2SD_BLOCK
IREF (ID := 1, X := 120, Y := 100, Operand
:= Valve_Command)
END_IREF
OREF (ID := 2, X := 460, Y := 140, Operand
:= Valve_Out)
END_OREF
END_SHEET
END_FBD_ROUTINE
ST_ROUTINE Prescan (Description := "This should run
before the Instruction does")
'//If Reset is True - do something
'IF (Reset) THEN
103
Chapter 5
' //do something

'END_IF;
'
END_ST_ROUTINE
104
Chapter 5
L5X unencoded safety AddOnInstruction definition example
L5K unencoded safety ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION _DEFINITION example

ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION HI_SafetyAOI (Description :=
"sealed safety AOI",
105
Chapter 5
Revision := 1.0, RevisionExtension := B,

RevisionNote := Original release to library,
Vendor := AOICreationsUnlimited, Class := Safety,
ExecutePrescan := Yes,
ExecutePostscan := No, ExecuteEnableInFalse := No,
CreatedDate := 2009-01-05T15:24:59.188Z, CreatedBy :=
apollo\drjones,
EditedDate := 2009-02-25T15:05:52.042Z, EditedBy :=
apollo\drjones,
AdditionalHelpText := My first HI Safety Add-On
Instruction)
HISTORY_ENTRY (User := apollo\drjones,
Timestamp := 2009-01-05T15:24:59.188Z, SignatureID :=
68F42D31,
Description := My First History Entry!)
END_ HISTORY_ENTRY
C7013D42,
Description := My Second History Entry!)
END_ HISTORY_ENTRY
F4E691A2,
Description := My Last History Entry!)
END_ HISTORY_ENTRY
(* PARAMETERS, LOCAL_TAGS, and ROUTINE blocks deleted for
brevity *)
106
Chapter 6
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the tag component.
Tag component
The tag component defines the tags associated with the logic you selected or
within the program you selected. Within a tag list in the L5K format, message and
motion tags must follow all non-motion tags, and axis tags must follow motion
group tag. Tags may appear in any order in the L5X format.
Important:
For detailed information about atomic and structure tags and their
supported attributes and ranges, see the Logix5000 Controller Common
Procedures Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM001.
L5X tag structure

<Tag [Tag_Attributes]>
<ConsumeInfo [Consume_Attributes]/>
<ProduceInfo [Produce_Attributes]/>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<Comments>
</Comment>
</Comments>
<EngineeringUnits>
</EngineeringUnit>
</EngineeringUnits>
<Mins>
</Mins>
<Maxes>
</Maxes>
<State0s>
107
Chapter 6

</State0>
</State0s>
<State1s>
</State1>
</State1s>
<Data>
value
</Data>
<ForceData>
value
</ForceData
</Tag>
L5K TAG structure

<tag_name> [OF alias] : <type["x,y,z"]>
[(Description := "text",
Comment := "text",
Comment := "text",
Max := value,
Min := value,
State0 := "text",
State1 := "text",
Tag_Attributes,
Produce_Attributes,
Consume_Attributes)]
[, <tag_force_data>] := value;
Tag elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
tag_name
The name of the tag.
N/A
alias
Name of the base tag that the alias tag references.
In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Tag> element.
Specify tag<specifier>
Where the specifier is a bit (.bitnumber), array element ([element]), or structure member
(.membername) of the tag.
In L5X, use an AliasFor attribute on the <Tag> element.
108
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
x, y, z
The number of elements within the array dimension.

For example [5, 10, 2].
Chapter 6
In an L5K array tag, there cannot be any white space between the type and array definition.
There must be a space between the tag name and the colon and another space between
that same colon and the type name.
In L5X, use a Dimension attribute on the <Tag> element.
ConsumeInfo
N/A
Identifies a consumed tag and provides the tag attributes.

In L5K, specify Consume_Attributes attributes .
ProduceInfo
N/A
Identifies a produced tag and provides the tag attributes.

In L5K, specify Produce_Attributes attributes.
Description
Description
User information about the tag.
Comment
Comment
Provide information about a tag component.

Can specify Comment<specifier>
.bitnumber for a bit in the tag.
[element] for an array element of the tag.
.membername
for a structure member of the tag.
There can be multiple comment elements.
Data
Tag data.
value
In L5X, this element can also contain additional attributes for other tag types.
EngineeringUnit
EngineeringUnit
(optional) User-specified description of what the unit of the value is, in feet, gallons, or
kilos.
.bitnumber - for a bit in the tag
[element] - for an array element of the tag
.membername - for a structure member of the tag
There can be multiple engineering unit elements.
Max
Max
(optional) User-specified maximum value about qualified sub-regions of the parameter.

Only valid for the sub-regions of the parameter, which is a non-Boolean atomic datatypes.
There can be multiple max elements.
109
Chapter 6
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
Min
Min
(optional) User-specified minimum value about qualified sub-regions of the parameter.

Only valid for the sub-regions of the parameter, which is a non-Boolean atomic datatypes.
There can be multiple min elements.
State0
State0
(optional) For Boolean parameters or sub-regions only. User-specified description of what

the Zero state of the Boolean value is.
There can be multiple stat0 elements.
State1
State1
(optional) For Boolean parameters (or sub-regions) only. User-specified description of what
the One state of the Boolean value is.
ForceData
tag_force_data
Tag force data.
Tag attributes
Attribute
Description
Name
The name of the tag.

TagType
110
L5X only. Type Base, Alias, Produce, or Consumed.
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
DataType
Type of tag.
Atomic types: BOOL, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, REAL
String types: STRING
Predefined types such as: AXIS_CONSUMED, AXIS_GENERIC_DRIVE, AXIS_SERVO, AXIS_SERVO_DRIVE, AXIS_VIRTUAL,
CAM, CAM_PROFILE, CONTROL, COORDINATE_SYSTEM, COUNTER, MESSAGE, MOTION_GROUP
Equipment phase types: PHASE, PHASE_INSTRUCTION
Safety types: CONNECTION_STATUS and unique types for each safety instruction
Function block types: unique type for each function block
Sequential function chart: SFC_ACTION, SFC_STEP, SFC_STOP
User-defined data types.
Add-On Instruction defined data types.
Module-defined data types.
AliasFor
L5X only. Name of the base tag that the alias tag references.
Specify tag<specifier>
Where the specifier is a bit (.bitnumber), array element ([element]), or structure member (.membername) of the tag, or
any combination such as [7].Input.0.
Dimensions
L5X only. The number of elements within the array dimension.

For example [5, 10, 2].
Class
Specify the class of the tag. This attribute applies only to safety controller projects. Type Standard or Safety.
Radix
Specify the display style as decimal, hex, octal, binary, exponential, float, ASCII, or date/time. (LINT only).
PLCMappingFile
If this tag is mapped to a PLC controller, specify the file number, which can be any positive number.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <ProduceInfo> element.
PLC2Mapping
If this tag is mapped to a PLC-2 file, set this attribute to 1. If this tag is not mapped to a PLC-2 file, set this attribute to 0.
ProgrammaticallySend
EventTrigger
If the project programmatically sends an event trigger, set this attribute to 1. Otherwise, set this attribute to 0.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <ProduceInfo> or <ConsumeInfo> element.

Unicast
Allow connections to be unidirectional, rather than bidirectional. Type Yes or No.
UnicastPermitted
Specify when unicast connections can be received. Type Yes or No.

Usage
Specify how an Equipment Phase program uses a tag. This attribute applies only to tags that are program-scoped to
an Equipment Phase program. Type Input, Output, or Normal.
Specify how a parameter is used. Type Input, Output, InOut, or Public.
Sequencing
Specify if the parameter can be seen by the FactoryTalk Batch Server. Only Input and Output parameters can be used by a
sequence. Usage is Input or Output.
ExternalAccess
Specify the external access, outside of the controller, to the tag. Specify Read/Write, Read Only, or None.
Max
(optional) User specified maximum value for the tag. Only valid for tag with non-Boolean atomic datatype.
Min
(optional) User specified minimum value for the tag. Only valid for tag with non-Boolean atomic datatype.
Constant
Specify whether the tag value is a constant value or it can change. For L5K, specify yes for a constant value or no for a
dynamic value. For L5X, specify true or false.
111
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
PermissionSet
Produced tag attributes

A produced tag has these attributes, and those for a standard tag.
Attribute
Description
ProduceCount
Specify the number of consumers allowed with any positive number.

In L5X, this attribute is on the <ProduceInfo> element.
MinimumRPI
Specify the smallest and fastest packet interval at which consumers may consume data from the tag (0.196...536870.911
and 1...536870.911 for CompactLogix).
MaximumRPI
Specify the largest and slowest packet interval at which consumers may consume data from the tag
(0.196...536870.911).
DefaultRPI
Specify a default RPI that the produced tag provides value to consumers that attempt to connect with an out-of-range
RPI (0.196...536870.911).
Consumed tag attributes

A consumed tag also has these attributes, in addition to those for a standard tag.
Important:
If consumed information is provided on an alias tag, the alias tag is converted to a base tag before it can consume data.
Attribute
Description
Producer
If the controller consumes this tag, specify the name of the remote controller that produces this tag. You must also specify RemoteTag and RPI
attributes.
RemoteTag
If the controller consumes this tag from a controller that supports tag names, specify the name of the tag on the remote controller. You must also
specify Producer and RPI attributes.
In L5X, this attribute is on the <ConsumeInfo> element.

RemoteFile
If the controller consumes this tag from a PLC-5 controller, specify the PLC-5 file number, as any positive number, on the PLC-5 controller. You must
also specify Producer and RPI attributes.
112
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
RPI
If the controller consumes this tag, specify the RPI value in milliseconds, as any positive number. You must also specify Producer and RemoteTag
attributes.
ALARM_ANALOG tag
L5X tag structure for ALARM_ANALOG tag

In an .L5X file, tag attributes for an ALARM_ANALOG tag are in the Data
element.
<Data Format="Alarm">
<AlarmAnalogParameters [Alarm_Analog_Attributes]/>
<AlarmConfig>
messages
alarm_class
HMI_command
</AlarmConfig>
</Data>
L5K tag structure for ALARM_ANALOG tag

In an .L5K file, tag attributes for an ALARM_ANALOG tag are in the tag
statement.
<tag_name> : <type>
[(Alarm_Analog_Attributes)]
ALARM_ANALOG tag attributes

Attribute
Description
EnableIn
Specify whether to enable the alarm tag. Type 0 to disable the tag; type 1 to enable the tag.
InFault
Specify the quality of the input fault data. Type 1 for bad quality; type 0 for good quality.
HHEnabled
Specify the whether the alarm monitors for a high-high limit. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
HEnabled
Specify the whether the alarms monitors for a high limit. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
LEnabled
Specify the whether the alarm monitors for a low limit. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
LLEnabled
Specify the whether the alarms monitors for a low-low limit. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
AckRequired
Specify whether the alarms requires acknowledgment. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgAckAll
Specify whether the program acknowledges all alarm conditions. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperAckAll
Specify whether an operator acknowledges all alarm conditions. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
113
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
HHProgAck
Specify whether the program acknowledges a high-high condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
HHOperAck
Specify whether an operator acknowledges a high-high condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
HProgAck
Specify whether the program acknowledges a high condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
HOperAck
Specify whether an operator acknowledges a high condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
LProgAck
Specify whether the program acknowledges a low condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
LOperAck
Specify whether an operator acknowledges a low condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
LLProgAck
Specify whether the program acknowledges a low-low condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
LLOperAck
Specify whether an operator acknowledges a low-low condition. Type 1 for enabled; type 0 for disabled.
HHOperShelve
Set by the operator to shelve a high-high condition.
HOperShelve
Set by the operator to shelve a high condition.
LOperShelve
Set by the operator to shelve a low condition.
LLOperShelve
Set by the operator to shelve a low-low condition.
ROCPosProgAck
Specify whether the program acknowledges a positive (increasing), rate-of-change condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ROCPosOperAck
Specify whether an operator acknowledges a positive (increasing), rate-of-change condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ROCPNegProgAck
Specify whether the program acknowledges a negative (decreasing), rate-of-change condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ROCPNegOperAck
Specify whether an operator acknowledges a negative (decreasing), rate-of-change condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ROCPosOperShelve
Set by the operator to shelve a positive rate-of-change condition.
ROCNegOperShelve
Set by the operator to shelve a negative rate-of-change condition.
ProgSuppress
Specify whether the program can suppress an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperSuppress
Specify whether an operator can suppress an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgUnsuppress
Specify whether the program can unsuppress an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperUnsuppress
Specify whether an operator can unsuppress an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgDisable
Specify whether the program disables an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperDisable
Specify whether an operator disables an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgEnable
Specify whether the program enables an alarm. Type 1 to enable; Type 0 to disable.
OperEnable
Specify whether an operator enables an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgUnshelveAll
Set by the user program to unshelve all conditions on this alarm.
AlarmCountReset
Specify whether to reset the alarm count. Type 1 to reset; type 0 to not reset.
In
Specify the analog input (REAL) to the alarm.
HHLimit
Specify the high-high limit (REAL) for the alarm condition.
HHSeverity
Specify the severity (1...500) of a high-high alarm condition.
HLimit
Specify the high limit (REAL) for the alarm condition.
HSeverity
Specify the severity (1...500) of a high alarm condition.
LLimit
Specify the low limit (REAL) for the alarm condition.
LSeverity
Specify the severity (1...500) of a low alarm condition.
LLLimit
Specify the low-low limit (REAL) for the alarm condition.
LLSeverity
Specify the severity (1...500) of a low-low alarm condition.
HHOperUnshelve
Set by the operator to unshelve a high-high condition.
HOperUnshelve
Set by the operator to unshelve a high condition.
114
Attribute
Description
LOperUnshelve
Set by the operator to unshelve a low condition.
LLOperUnshelve
Set by the operator to unshelve a low-low condition.
MinDurationPRE
Specify the minimum time (DINT) an alarm condition to remain true for the alarm to be considered active.
HHMinDurationEnable
Set to enable minimum duration timer when detecting the high-high condition.
HMinDurationEnable
Set to enable minimum duration timer when detecting the high condition.
LMinDurationEnable
Set to enable minimum duration timer when detecting the low condition.
LLMinDurationEnable
Set to enable minimum duration timer when detecting the low-low condition.
Deadband
Specify the deadband (REAL) for the high-high, high, low, and low-low levels.
ROCPosLimit
Specify the positive rate-of-change limit (REAL) for the alarm condition.
ROCPosSeverity
Specify the severity (1...500) of a positive rate-of-change alarm condition.
ROCNegLimit
Specify the negative rate-of-change limit (REAL) for the alarm condition.
ROCNegSeverity
Specify the severity (1...500) of a negative rate-of-change alarm condition.
ROCPeriod
Specify the time period (seconds) to evaluate rate-of-change conditions.
ROCPosOperUnshelve
Set by the operator to unshelve a positive rate-of-change condition.
ROCNegOperUnshelve
Set by the operator to unshelve a negative rate-of-change condition.
ShelveDuration
Time duration for which a shelved alarm will be shelved, between 1 and MaxShelveDuration.
MaxShelveDuration
Maximum time duration for which an alarm can be shelved.
AssocTag1
Specify a tag associated with the alarm.
AssocTag2
AssocTag3
AssocTag4
AlarmClass
Specify an alarm class for the alarm.
Chapter 6
In L5X, use an AlarmClass element in the Data Element.

HMICmd
Specify a command string for the HMI.

In L5X, use an HMICommand element in the Data Element.
ALARM_DIGITAL tag
L5X tag structure for ALARM_DIGITAL tag

In an .L5X file, tag attributes for an ALARM_DIGITAL tag are in the Data
element.
<Data Format="Alarm">
<AlarmDigitalParameters [Alarm_Digital_Attributes]/>
<AlarmConfig>
message
alarm_class
HMI_command
</AlarmConfig>
115
Chapter 6
</Data>
L5K tag structure for an ALARM_DIGITAL tag

In an .L5K file, tag attributes for an ALARM_DIGITAL tag are in the tag
statement.
<tag_name> : <type>
[(Alarm_Digital_Attributes)] := value;
ALARM_DIGITAL tag attributes

Attribute
Description
EnableIn
Specify whether to enable the alarm tag. Type 1 to enable the tag; type 0 to disable the tag
In
Specify the analog input to the alarm.
InFault
Specify the quality of the input fault data. Type 1 for bad quality; type 0 for good quality.
Condition
Specify whether the alarm condition exists. Type 1 for yes; type 0 for no.
AckRequired
Specify whether the alarms require acknowledgment. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
Latched
Specify whether the alarm output is latched. Type 1 for yes; type 0 for no.
ProgAck
Specify whether the program acknowledges the alarm condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperAck
Specify whether an operator acknowledges the alarm condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgReset
Specify whether the program resets the alarm condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperReset
Specify whether an operator resets the alarm condition. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgSuppress
Specify whether the program can suppress an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperSuppress
Specify whether an operator can suppress an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgUnsuppress
Specify whether the program can unsuppress an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperUnsuppress
Specify whether an operator can unsuppress an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgDisable
Specify whether the program disables an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperDisable
Specify whether an operator disables an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
ProgEnable
Specify whether the program enables an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
OperEnable
Specify whether an operator enables an alarm. Type 1 to enable; type 0 to disable.
AlarmCountReset
Specify whether to reset the alarm count. Type 1 to reset; type 0 to not reset.
UseProgTime
Specify how to timestamp alarm events. Type 1 for programmatic timestamp; type 0 for controller timestamp.
ProgTime
Specify the programmatic timestamp (LINT).
Severity
Specify the severity (1...500) of the alarm condition.
MinDurationPRE
Specify the minimum time (DINT) an alarm condition remains true for the alarm to be considered active.
OperShelve
Set by the operator interface to shelve the alarm.
ProgUnshelve
Set by the user program to unshelve the alarm.
OperUnshelve
Set by the operator interface to unshelve the alarm.
116
Attribute
Description
ShelveDuration
Time duration for which a shelved alarm is shelved, between 1 and MaxShelveDuration.
MaxShelveDuration
Maximum time duration that an alarm is shelved.
AssocTag1
AssocTag2
AssocTag3
AssocTag4
AlarmClass
Chapter 6
In L5X, use an AlarmClass element in the Data Element.

HMICmd

In L5X, use an HMICommand element in the Data Element.
L5X AlarmConfig structure
In an .L5X file, the AlarmConfig element contains the alarm message text alarm
class, and HMI command.
<AlarmConfig>
<Messages>
<Message Type="type">
<Text Lang="language">
<![CDATA[ message_text ]]>
</Text>
</Message>
/Messages>
<AlarmClass>
<![CDATA[ class_text ]]>
</AlarmClass>
<HMICommand>
<![CDATA[ command_text ]]>
</HMICommand>
</AlarmConfig>
117
Chapter 6
AlarmConfig elements
L5X Item
Description
Message
Each message element contains a separate message. Specify a Type attribute for the analog
alarm type.
Specify
For
HH
high-high alarm
H
high alarm
L
low alarm
LL
low-low alarm
POS
rate-of-change positive alarm
NEG
rate-of change negative alarm
Text
The text of the message. Specify a Lang attribute for the language: EN-US (United States
English), DE (Germany German), ES (Spain Spanish), FR (France French), IT (Italian), PT
(Brazil Portuguese), JA (Japanese), KO (Korean), ZH (Chinese).
AlarmClass
HMICommand
L5K ANALOG_ALARM message structure

In an .L5K file, the ALMMSG statement contains the alarm message text.
ALMMSG.<alarm_type>:<language>:=<"message_text">
ALMMSG elements
L5K Item
Description
alarm_type
For an analog alarm type.

Specify
For
HH
high-high alarm
H
high alarm
L
low alarm
LL
low-low alarm
POS
rate-of-change positive alarm
NEG
rate-of change negative alarm
Specify AM for a digital alarm.
118
language
Languages: EN-US (United States English), DE (Germany German), ES (Spain Spanish), FR

(France French), IT (Italian), PT (Brazil Portuguese), JA (Japanese), KO (Korean), ZH
(Chinese).
message_text
Alarm message.
Enclose the message in double quotes (" "). This is a unicode string.
MESSAGE tag
Chapter 6
Message tag structure is explained in these pages.
L5X message structure

In an .L5X file, message attributes are in the Data element.
<Data Format="Message">
<MessageParameters [Message_Attributes]/>
</Data>
L5K MESSAGE structure

In an .L5K file, message attributes are in the tag statement.
<tag_name> : <type>
[(Message_Attributes)];
Message tag attributes

Attribute
Description
MessageType
Type Block Transfer Read, Block Transfer Write, CIP Data Table Read, CIP Data Table Write, CIP Generic, PLC2
Unprotected Read, PLC2 Unprotected Write, PLC3 Typed Read, PLC3 Typed Write, PLC3 Word Range Read,
PLC3 Word Range Write, PLC5 Typed Read, PLC5 Typed Write, PLC5 Word Range Read, PLC5 Word Range
Write, SERCOS IDN Read, SERCOS IDN Write, SLC Typed Read, SLC Typed Write, Unconfigured, or Module
Reconfigure.
RemoteElement
Specify the address or tag name of the element in the remote device. This is the source element of a read instruction or
the destination element of a write instruction.
RequestedLength
Specify the number of elements to be transferred (0...32,767).
ConnectedFlag
Specify whether the CIP generic message requires a connection or not. Type 1 for connected, or 0 for not connected.
ConnectionPath
Specify the connection path to the other device.
CommTypeCode
Specify the type of communication method.

Type:
For this communication method:
CIP (most messages use CIP communications)
DH+
CIP with source ID
block transfer via universal remote I/O
block transfer via ControlNet
ServiceCode
If the message type is CIP Generic, specify the service code (0...32,767 hexadecimal).
ObjectType
If the message type is CIP Generic, specify the object type (0...32,767 hexadecimal). The ObjectType attribute is the same
as the Class field on the MSG configuration dialog box.
TargetObject
If the message type is CIP Generic, specify the target object (0...32,767 decimal). The TargetObject attribute is the same
as the Instance field on the MSG configuration dialog box.
119
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
AttributeNumber
If the message type is CIP Generic, specify the attribute number (0...65,535 hexadecimal).
Channel
For a DH+ or block transfer message, specify the channel. Type A or B.
SourceLink
If the communication method uses DH+, specify the source link (0...199).
DestinationLink
If the communication method uses DH+, specify the destination link (0...199).
DestinationNode
If the communication method uses DH+, specify the destination node number (0...77 octal).
Rack
For a DH+ or block transfer message, type the rack number (0...77 octal) of the target device.
Group
For a DH+ or block transfer message, type the group number (0...7) of the target device.
Slot
For a DH+ or block transfer message, type the slot number (0...15) of the target device.
LocalIndex
Specify the index into the local element, typically 0.
RemoteIndex
Specify the index into the remote element, typically 0.
LocalElement
Specify the tag name of the element in the local controller. This is the destination element of a read instruction or the
source element of a write instruction.
DestinationTag
Specify the tag name of the destination element.
CacheConnections
If the message is to cache connections, type TRUE. If the message is not to cache connections, type FALSE.
LargePacketUsage
CIP Generic type messages with a cached connection can be configured to use either a standard or large size packet.
True makes use of the large packet size.
AXIS_CIP_DRIVE,
AXIS_CONSUMED,
AXIS_GENERIC_DRIVE,
AXIS_SERVO,
AXIS_SERVO_DRIVE, or
AXIS_VIRTUAL Tag
Each of the axis tags has this structure.
L5X axis structure

In an .L5X file, axis attributes are in the Data element.
<Data Format="Axis">
<AxisParameters [Axis_Attributes]/>
</Data>
L5K AXIS TAG structure

In an .L5K file, axis attributes are in the tag statement.
<tag_name> : <type>
[(Axis_Attributes)];
Axis tag attributes

These attributes are for the AXIS_CONSUMED, AXIS_GENERIC_DRIVE,
AXIS_SERVO, AXIS_SERVO_DRIVE, and AXIS_VIRTUAL tags.
120
Chapter 6
For information about attributes for AXIS_CIP_DRIVE tags, see the Integrated
Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network Configuration and Startup User Manual
publication MOTION-UM003.
Attribute
Description
MotionGroup
Type the name of the associated motion group, or type NA.

For L5X, if there is no Motion group, then the attribute is not present.
MotionModule
Type the name of the associated motion module, or type NA.

For L5X, if there is no Motion module, then the attribute is not present.
MotorCatalogNumber
Specify the catalog number of the motor that this axis is connected or type NONE.
RotationalPosResolution
Specify the number of counts per motor revolution (1...[232-1]).
ConversionConstant
Specify the number of feedback counts per position unit. Type a real number from 1.0...1.0e9.
OutputCamExecutionTargets
Specify the number of output cam execution targets (any positive number).
AxisState
Type Axis-Ready, Direct Drive Control, Servo Control, Axis Faulted, or Axis Shutdown.
PositionUnits
Specify user-defined engineering units, rather than feedback units.
AverageVelocityTimebase
Specify the time in seconds for calculating the average velocity of the axis (any positive number).
RotaryAxis
Specify the positioning mode for an axis. Type Rotary or Linear.
PositionUnwind
For a rotary axis, specify the distance, in feedback counts, used to perform electronic unwind (any positive number).
HomeMode
Specify the homing mode. Type Passive, Active, or Absolute.
HomeDirection
For active homing sequences, except for the immediate sequence type, specify the desired homing direction. Type Unidirectional Forward, Bi-directional Forward, Uni-directional Reverse, or Bi-directional Reverse.
HomeSequence
Specify the event that will cause the home position to be set. Type Immediate, Switch, Marker, Switch-Marker, Torque
Level, or Torque Level-Marker.
HomeConfigurationBits
Specify the home configuration bits. Type a hexadecimal number.
HomePosition
Specify the desired absolute position, in positioning units, for the axis after the homing sequence is complete (any positive
number).
HomeOffset
Specify the desired offset (any positive number) in position units the axis is to move, upon completion of the homing sequence,
to reach the home position. In most cases, this value will be zero.
HomeSpeed
Specify the speed of the jog profile used in the first leg of the homing sequence (any positive number). The homing speed
should be less than the maximum speed, and greater than zero.
HomeReturnSpeed
Specify speed of the jog profile used in the return leg(s) of an active homing sequence (any positive number). The return speed
should be less than the maximum speed, and greater than zero.
MaximumSpeed
Specify the maximum speed (any positive number).
MaximumAcceleration
Specify the maximum acceleration rate of the axis in position units/second (any positive number).
MaximumDeceleration
Specify the maximum deceleration rate of the axis in position units/second (any positive number).
ProgrammedStopMode
Specify how a specific axis stops when the controller changes mode, or a motion group stop (MGS) instruction is executed. Type
Fast Disable, Fast Stop, Fast Shutdown, Hard Disable, or Hard Shutdown.
MasterInputConfigurationBits
Specify the master input configuration bits. Type a hexadecimal number.
MasterPositionFilterBandwidth
Specify the bandwidth in Hertz of the master position filter.
AxisType
Specify the intended use of the axis. Type Servo or Feedback Only.
ServoLoopConfiguration
Specify the configuration of the loop. Type Custom, Position Servo, Aux Position Servo, Dual Position Servo, Aux
Command Servo, Dual Command Servo, Velocity Servo, or Torque Servo.
121
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
ExternalDriveType
Specify the type of external drive.

Specify: To:
0
Torque servo
1
Velocity servo
2
Hydraulic servo
FaultConfigurationBits
Specify the fault configuration bits. Type a hexadecimal number.
AxisInfoSelect1
Specify an axis attribute to transmit, and the actual position data, to the controller.
The options include:
<none>
Position Command
Position Feedback
Aux Position Feedback
Position Error
Position Int.
Error
Velocity Command
Velocity Feedback
Velocity Error
Velocity Int. Error
Accel. Command
Accel. Feedback
Servo Output Level
Marker Distance
Torque Command
Torque Feedback
Positive Dynamic Torque Limit
Negative Dynamic Torque Limit
Motor Capacity, Drive Capacity
Power Capacity
Bus Regulator Capacity
Motor Electrical Angle
Torque Limit Source
DC Bus Voltage
Absolute Offset
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 2
Guard Status
Guard Faults
122
Attribute
Description
AxisInfoSelect2
Specify a second axis attribute to transmit, and the actual position data, to the controller.
The options include:
<none>
Chapter 6
Position Command
Position Feedback
Aux Position Feedback
Position Error
Position Int. Error
Velocity Command
Velocity Feedback
Velocity Error
Velocity Int. Error
Accel. Command
Accel. Feedback
Servo Output Level
Marker Distance
Torque Command
Torque Feedback
Positive Dynamic Torque Limit
Negative Dynamic Torque Limit
Motor Capacity
Drive Capacity
Power Capacity
Bus Regulator Capacity
Motor Electrical Angle
Torque Limit Source
DC Bus Voltage
Absolute Offset
Analog Input 1 or Analog Input 2
Absolute Offset
Analog Input 1
Analog Input 2
Guard Status
Guard Faults.
LDTType
Specify the LDT device type. Type PWM, Start/Stop Rising, or Start/Stop Falling.
LDTRecirculations
Only use this field if you specified PWM for LDTType. Specify the number of recirculations that the transducer is configured for
so the 1756-HYD02 module knows how the LDT is configured.
LDTCalibrationConstant
Specify the calibration constant (also called gradient on some LDTs). This number is engraved on each LDT by the
manufacturer. It specifies the characteristics of that individual transducer.
LDTCalibrationConstantUnits
Specify the units of the calibration constant. Type us/in or m/s.
LDTScaling
Define the relationship between the unit of measurement of the transducer and the system. This is necessary for calculating
the conversion constant. The LDT length is used with the number of recirculations to calculate the minimum servo update
period.
123
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
LDTScalingUnits
Specify the units of scaling. Type us/in or m/s.
LDTLength
Specify the length of the LDT.
LDTLengthUnits
Specify the units of length. Type us/in or m/s.
SSICodeType
Specify the encoding on the data sent from an SSI transducer. Type Binary or Grey.
SSIDataLength
Specify the data length (8...32 bits) of the SSI transducer. The default value is 13.
SSIClockFrequency
Specify the SSI clock frequency (in kHz). Valid values are 208 (default) or 650.
AbsoluteFeedbackEnable
Specify whether to enable absolute feedback. Type 1 to enable absolute feedback. Otherwise, type 0. Absolute feedback is
always enabled for LDT.
AbsoluteFeedbackOffset
Specify the absolute offset that is used to place the machine zero point at the desired location relative to the zero point of the
LDT.
ServoFeedbackType
Specify the type of feedback device. Type LDT (linear displacement transducer),
AQB (A quadrature B), or SSI (synchronous serial interface)
ServoPolarityBits
Specify the servo polarity bits. Type a hexadecimal number.
VelocityFeedforwardGain
Specify the velocity feedforward gain (any positive number).
AccelerationFeedforwardGain
Specify the acceleration feedforward gain (any positive number).
PositionProportionalGain
Specify the position proportional gain (any positive number).
PositionIntegralGain
Specify the position integral gain (any positive number).
VelocityProportionalGain
Specify the velocity proportional gain (any positive number).
VelocityIntegralGain
Specify the velocity integral gain (any positive number).
VelocityScaling
Specify the velocity scaling attribute that is used to convert the output of the servo loop into equivalent voltage to an external
velocity servo drive.
TorqueScaling
Specify the torque scaling attribute that is used to convert the acceleration of the servo loop into equivalent % rated torque to
the motor.
OutputLPFilterBandwidth
Specify the bandwidth in Hertz of the servo low-pass digital output filter.
IntegratorHoldEnable
Type Disabled or Enabled.
PositionDifferentialGain
Specify a position differential gain (PosD) to help predict a large overshoot ahead of time and attempt to correct before the
overshoot actually occurs.
DirectionalScalingRatio
Specify the ratio between the extend direction gain and the retract direction gain.
MaximumPositiveTravel
Specify the maximum positive position (any positive number) to be used for software overtravel checking in position units.
MaximumNegativeTravel
Specify the maximum negative position (any positive number) to be used for software overtravel checking, in position units.
PositionErrorTolerance
Specify the how position error the servo module tolerates (any positive number) before it issues a position error fault.
PositionLockTolerance
Specify the maximum position error the servo module accepts (any positive number) to indicate that the position lock status
bit is set.
OutputLimit
Specify the maximum servo output voltage of a physical axis (any positive number).
DirectDriveRampRate
Specify the rate at which the analog output changes from the current value to the requested value when an MDO command is
given (if ramp control is enabled). The ramp rate is specified in Volts per second.
OutputOffset
Specify a fixed voltage value (-10...10V) to add to the servo output value to correct axis drift.
VelocityOffset
Specify a dynamic velocity correction to the output of the position servo loop, in position units/second (any positive number).
TorqueOffset
Specify a dynamic torque command correction to the output of the velocity servo loop as a percentage of the velocity servo
loop output (-100...100).
124
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
FrictionCompensation
Specify the percentage (0...100) of output level added to a positive current servo output value, or subtracted from a negative
current servo output value to move an axis stuck in place from static friction.
FrictionCompensationWindow
This window is defined as:

command position - window attribute to command position + window attribute
While the command velocity is zero and the actual position is within this window, the friction compensation, or deadband
compensation, for hydraulics, is applied proportionally to the position error. While the command velocity is non-zero, the full
friction compensation is applied.
BacklashStabilizationWindow
The window controls the backlash stabilization feature in the servo control loop. Mechanical backlash is a common problem in
applications that use mechanical gearboxes.
BacklashReversalOffset
Specify the backlash reversal error to compensate for positional inaccuracy introduced by mechanical backlash.
HardOvertravelFaultAction
Specify the fault action taken when a hardware overtravel error occurs. Type Shutdown, Disable Drive, Stop Motion, or
Status Only.
SoftOvertravelFaultAction
Specify the fault action taken when a software overtravel error occurs. Type Shutdown, Disable Drive, Stop Motion, or
Status Only.
PositionErrorFaultAction
Type Shutdown, Disable Drive, Stop Motion, or Status Only.
FeedbackFaultAction
Specify the fault action to be taken when a feedback loss condition is detected. Type Shutdown, Disable Drive, Stop
Motion, or Status Only.
FeedbackNoiseFaultAction
Specify the fault action to be taken when excessive feedback noise is detected. Type Shutdown, Disable Drive, Stop
DriveFaultAction
Specify the fault action to be taken when a drive fault condition is detected. Type Shutdown, Disable Drive, Stop Motion,
or Status Only.
TestIncrement
Specify the amount of distance traversed by the axis when executing the output and feedback test (any positive number).
TuningTravelLimit
Specify the tuning travel limit in revolutions (any positive number).
TuningSpeed
Specify the tuning speed in revolutions per second (any positive number).
TuningTorque
Specify the tuning torque % rated (0...300).
DampingFactor
Specify the damping factor (0.5...2).
DriveModelTimeConstant
Specify the drive model time constant (1.0e-6f...1).
PositionServoBandwidth
Specify the maximum allowable value for position bandwidth (0.001F...1000), given the damping factor. This parameter is
disabled if the loop configuration is set to velocity.
VelocityServoBandwidth
Specify the unity gain bandwidth that is to be used to calculate the subsequent gains for a motion apply axis tuning (MAAT)
instruction (0.001F...1000).
TuningConfigurationBits
Specify the tuning configuration bits. Type a hexadecimal number.
TorqueLimitSource
Type Not Limited, Negative Limit, Positive Limit, Bridge Limit, I(t) Limit, or Motor Limit.
DriveUnit
Specify the units of the drive. Type us/in or m/s.
PositionDataScaling
Specify the scaling method used on position values (0...255).
PositionDataScalingFactor
Specify the scaling factor for all position data in a drive (1...65535).
PositionDataScalingExp
Specify the scaling exponent for all position data in a drive (-32768...32767).
VelocityDataScaling
Specify the scaling method to use for all velocity values (0...127).
VelocityDataScalingFactor
Specify the scaling factor for all velocity data (1...65535).
VelocityDataScalingExp
Specify the scaling exponent for all velocity data (-32768...32767).
AccelerationDataScaling
Specify the scaling method for all acceleration values (0...127).
AccelerationData
ScalingFactor
Specify the scaling factor for all acceleration data (1...65535).
125
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
AccelerationDataScalingExp
Specify the scaling exponent for all acceleration data (-32768...32767).
TorqueDataScaling
Specify the scaling method for all torque values (0...127).
TorqueDataScalingFactor
Specify the scaling factor for all torque values (1...65535).
TorqueDataScalingExp
Specify the scaling exponent for all torque values (-32768...32767).
DrivePolarity
Specify the polarity of the servo loop of the drive. Type Custom, Positive, or Negative.
MotorFeedbackType
Specify the type of motor associated with the selected motor (MotorCatalogNumber). If you specify NONE for the motor, you
must specify a feedback type.
MotorFeedbackResolution
Specify the resolution of the motor (1...2147483647).
AuxFeedbackType
Specify the type of auxiliary feedback device.
AuxFeedbackResolution
Specify the resolution of the auxiliary feedback device (1...2147483647).
MotorFeedbackUnit
Specify the units for motor feedback. Type Rev, Inch, or Millimeter.
AuxFeedbackUnit
Specify the units for auxiliary feedback. Type Rev, Inch, or Millimeter.
OutputNotchFilterFrequency
Specify the frequency of the digital notch filer of the drive (0...10,000.0).
VelocityDroop
Specify the velocity droop (any positive number).
VelocityLimitBipolar
Specify the velocity limit symmetrically in both directions (any positive number).
AccelerationLimitBipolar
Specify the acceleration and deceleration limits for the drive (any positive number).
TorqueLimitBipolar
Specify the torque limit symmetrically in both directions (0...1000.0).
VelocityLimitPositive
Specify the maximum allowable velocity in the positive direction (any positive number).
VelocityLimitNegative
Specify the maximum allowable velocity in the negative direction (any positive number).
VelocityThreshold
Specify the velocity threshold limit (any positive number).
VelocityWindow
Specify the limits of the velocity window (any positive number).
VelocityStandstillWindow
Specify the velocity limit for the standstill window (any positive number).
AccelerationLimitPositive
Specify the maximum acceleration ability of the drive (any positive number).
AccelerationLimitNegative
Specify the maximum acceleration ability of the drive (any negative number).
TorqueLimitPositive
Specify the maximum torque in the positive direction (0...1000.0).
TorqueLimitNegative
Specify the maximum torque in the negative direction (-1000.0...0).
TorqueThreshold
Specify the torque threshold (0...1000.0).
DriveThermalFaultAction
Specify the fault action to be taken when a drive thermal fault is detected. Type Shutdown, Disable Drive, Stop Motion, or
Status Only.
MotorThermalFaultAction
Specify the fault action to be taken when a motor thermal fault is detected. Type Shutdown, Disable Drive, Stop Motion, or
Status Only.
DriveEnableInputFaultAction
Specify the fault action to be taken when a drive enable input fault is detected. Type Shutdown, Disable Drive, Stop
StoppingTorque
Specify the amount of torque available to stop the motor (0...1000).
StoppingTimeLimit
Specify the maximum amount of time that the drive amplifier will remain enabled while trying to stop (0...6553.5).
BrakeEngageDelayTime
Specify the amount of time that the drive maintains torque when the servo axis is disabled, and the drive decelerates to a
minimum speed (0...6.5535).
BrakeReleaseDelayTime
Specify amount of time that the drive ignores command values from the controller when the servo axis is enabled, and the
drive activates the torque (0...6.5535).
PowerSupplyID
Specify the power supply ID (any positive number).
BusRegulatorID
Specify the bus regulator ID (any positive number).
126
Attribute
Description
PWMFrequencySelect
Specify High Frequency or Low Frequency.
Chapter 6
LoadInertiaRatio
Specify the load inertia ratio (any positive number).
AmplifierCatalogNumber
Specify the catalog number of the amplifier to which this axis is connected.
AuxFeedbackRatio
Specify the auxiliary feedback ratio (any positive number).
ContinuousTorqueLimit
Specify the maximum torque limit (0...200).
ResistiveBrakeContactDelay
Specify amount of time to delay resistive brake contact.
ConfigurationProfile
Specify the minimum set of attributes the drive can support.

Specify: To:
0
Rockwell classic (identifies past systems for backward compatibility)
1
Packaging (identifies packaging applications)
RegistrationInputs
Specify the number of drive-resident (probe) inputs. Up to two registration inputs per axis.
MaximumAccelerationJerk
Specify the value motion instructions used to determine the maximum acceleration jerk rate to apply to the axis when
acceleration jerk is specified as a percent of the maximum. This value is only used by a S-curve profile.
MaximumDecelerationJerk
Specify the value motion instructions used to determine the maximum deceleration jerk rate to apply to the axis when
deceleration jerk is specified as a percent of the maximum. This value is only used by a S-curve profile.
DynamicsConfigurationBits
Specify the S-curve profile.

Specify: To:
0
Reduce S-curve stop delay
1
Prevent S-curve velocity reversals
PhaseLossFaultAction
Specify how the axis responds to a drive fault. The default is 1 (disable drive).
Specify: To:
0
Shutdown
1
Disable drive
2
Stop command
3
Status only
HomeTorqueLevel
Specify the torque limit when using one of the torque homing modes. Type the percent (0...TorqueLimitPositive) of continuous
torque. The default is 0%.
InputPowerPhase
Specify the power phase operation of a Kinetix 2000 drive. Type 0 for three-phase power; type 1 for single-phase power.
MotorRatedContinuousCurrent
The nameplate AC continuous current rating of the motor (any positive number). This is a database number and should not be
changed.
MotorRatedPeakCurrent
The peak or intermittent current rating of the motor (any positive number). This is a database number and should not be
changed.
RotaryMotorInertia
The unloaded inertia of a rotary motor.
RotaryMotorRatedSpeed
The nameplate rated speed of a rotary motor (any positive number). This is a database number and should not be changed.
LinearMotorRatedSpeed
The nameplate rated speed of a linear motor (any positive number). This is a database number and should not be changed.
LinearMotorMass
The unloaded moving mass of a linear motor (any positive number). This is a database number and should not be changed.
MotorData
The motor data associated with the currently selected catalog number. This should not be changed.
AdditionalBusCapacitance
Specify the Additional Bus Capacitance.

Valid values are in the range of 0...65535
InterpolatedPositionConfiguration
Specify the Interpolated Position Configuration.

Type a hexadecimal number.
127
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
AxisUpdateSchedule
Specify an enumeration that indicates which update rate, the Base, Alternate 1 or Alternate 2 update period, to use to update
the Axis.
COORDINATE_SYSTEM tag
L5X CoordinateSystem structure

In an .L5X file, coordinate system attributes are in the Data element.
<Data Format="CoordinateSystem">
<CoordinateSystemParameters
[Coordinate_System_Attributes]/>
</Data>
L5K COORDINATE_SYSTEM structure

In an .L5K file, coordinate system attributes are in the tag statement.
<tag_name> : <type>
[(Coordinate_System_Attributes)]
Coordinate system tag attributes

Attribute
Description
MotionGroupInstance
Type the name of the associated motion group or type NA.
SystemType
Specify the coordinate system type. Type Cartesian, Articulated Dependent, Articulated Independent, Delta,
SCARA Delta, or SCARA Independent.
Dimension
Specify the number of axes that this coordinated system supports. Type 1, 2, or 3.
Axes
Specify the name of the axes in this coordinated system.
CoordinationMode
Specify coordination mode. Type Primary or Ancillary.
CoordinationUnits
Specify units to be used for measuring and calculating motion related values such as position, velocity. Type units that
are relevant to your application.
ConversionRatioNumerator
The conversion ratio defines the relationship of axis position units to coordination units for each axis. Type the numerator
as a float or an integer.
ConversionRatioDenominator
The conversion ratio defines the relationship of axis position units to coordination units for each axis. Type the
denominator as an integer.
CoordinateSystemAutoTagUpdate
Specify whether or not the actual position values of the current coordinated system are automatically updated during
operation. To enable auto tag update, type 1. Otherwise, type 0.
MaximumSpeed
Specify the maximum speed to be used by the coordinated motion instructions in calculating vector speed when speed is
expressed as a percent of maximum.
128
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
MaximumAcceleration
Specify the value for maximum acceleration to be used by the coordinated motion instructions to determine the
acceleration rate to apply to the coordinate system vector when acceleration is expressed as a percent of maximum.
MaximumDeceleration
Specify the value for maximum deceleration to be used by the coordinated motion instructions to determine the
deceleration rate to apply to the coordinate system vector when deceleration is expressed as a percent of maximum.
ActualPositionTolerance
Specify the value in coordination units, for actual position to be used by coordinated motion instructions when they have
a termination type of actual tolerance.
CommandPositionTolerance
Specify the value in coordination units, for command position to be used by coordinated motion instructions when they
have a termination type of command tolerance.
TransformDimension
Specify the transform dimension.
JointRatioNumerator
Specify numerator of the joint ratio.
JointRatioDenominator
Specify denominator of the joint ratio.
LinkLength1
Specify the length of Robotic Arm 1.
LinkLength2
Specify the length of Robotic Arm 2.
ZeroAngleOffset1
Specify the rotational angular offset of joint axes 1 in degrees. This is used to shift the 0 degree position of the joint.
ZeroAngleOffset2
ZeroAngleOffset3
BaseOffset1
Specify the difference for the first axis between the origin of the robot at the first joint of the robotic arm, as determined
by the applications Kinematics internal equations, and the origin defined by the robot manufacturer.
BaseOffset2
Specify the difference for the second axis between the origin of the robot at the first joint of the robotic arm, as
determined by the applications Kinematics internal equations, and the origin defined by the robot manufacturer.
BaseOffset3
Specify the difference for the third axis between the origin of the robot at the first joint of the robotic arm, as determined
by the applications Kinematics internal equations, and the origin defined by the robot manufacturer.
EndEffectorOffset1
Specify the end effector offset value, which is the distance between the end of the robot arm L2 and the end of the end
effector in the x1 dimension.
EndEffectorOffset2
EndEffectorOffset3
MaximumAccelerationJerk
Specify the value for maximum acceleration jerk to be used by the coordinated motion instructions to determine the
acceleration jerk rate to apply to the coordinate system vector when acceleration jerk is expressed as a percent of
maximum.
MaximumDecelerationJerk
Specify the value for maximum deceleration jerk to be used by the coordinated motion instructions to determine the
deceleration jerk rate to apply to the coordinate system vector when deceleration jerk is expressed as a percent of
maximum
MasterInputConfigurationBits
Specify the master input configuration bits.

Type a hexadecimal number.
MasterPositionFilterBandwidth
MOTION_GROUP Tag
Specify the Master Position Filter Bandwidth.
L5X MotionGroup structure

In an .L5X file, motion group attributes are in the Data element.
129
Chapter 6
<Data Format="MotionGroup">
<MotionGroupParameters [Motion_Group_Attributes]/>
</Data>
L5K MOTION_GROUP structure

In an .L5K file, motion group attributes are in the tag statement.
<tag_name> : <type>
[(Motion_Group_Attributes)];
Motion Group Tag attributes

Attribute
Description
GroupType
Specify the type of motion group. Type Warning Enabled or Warning Disabled.
CourseUpdatePeriod
Specify the coarse update period in milliseconds (500...3200ms).
PhaseShift
Specify the phase shift (0...65,535).
GeneralFaultType
Specify whether an error generates a major fault or a non-major fault. Type Major Fault or Non Major Fault.
AutoTagUpdate
Type Disabled or Enabled.
Alternate1UpdateMultiplier
Specify the value that is multiplied by the Base Update Period, which was previously called the Coarse Update Period. The result is displayed
as the Alternate 1 Update Period.
Alternate2UpdateMultiplier
Specify the value that is multiplied by the Base Update Period, which was previously called the Coarse Update Period. The result is
displayed as the Alternate 2 Update Period.
HMIBC tag
L5X HMIBC structure

In an .L5X file, HMIBC attributes are in the Data element.
<Tag Name="MyHMIBC" TagType="Base" DataType="HMIBC"
ExternalAccess="Read/Write">
<Data Format="HMIBC">
<HMIBCParameters EnableIn="false" ProgFB="false"
BitIndex="0" TerminalCount="0"/>
</Data>
</Tag>
L5K HMIBC structure

TAG
130
Chapter 6
myHMIBC : HMIBC (EnableIn := "false",

ProgFB := "false");
END_TAG
HMIBC attributes
SAFETY tag
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
EnableIn
EnableIn
Relay Ladder: Corresponds to the rung state. Does not affect processing.
Function Block: If cleared, the instruction does not execute and outputs are not
updated. If set, the instruction executes. Default is set.
Structured Text: No effect. The instruction always executes.
Value: true or false
ProgFB
ProgFB
Program Feedback. For use by the user program. Not used by the instruction.
Value: true or false
BitIndex
L5X Only: Export only, ignored on import

Value: 0 - 65535
TerminalCount
L5X Only: Export only, ignored on import

Value: 0 - 65535
L5X safety structure

In an .L5X file, safety attributes are in the Data element.
<Data Foamt="Safety">
<SafetyParameters [Safety_Attributes]/>
</Data>
L5K SAFETY structure

In an .L5K file, safety attributes are in the tag statement.
<tag_name> : <type>
[(Safety_Attributes)] := value;
Safety tag attributes

A safety produced or safety consumed tag (Class = Safety) has these attributes, and
the attributes for a standard tag.
131
Chapter 6
Attribute
Description
TimeoutMultiplier
Specify the timeout multiplier (default = 2) for a safety controller system. This value determines the RPIs of time to wait
for a packet before declaring a time out. This translates into the number of messages that may be lost before declaring a
connection error. A Timeout Multiplier of 1 indicates that no messages may be lost, which means there must be a packet
every RPI interval. A Timeout Multiplier of 2 indicates that 1 message may be lost, which means as long as a packet is
seen in 2 times the RPI, no time-out will occur. Type a number from 1...4, inclusive.
This attribute applies only to safety consumed tags.
For L5X, this attribute is on the <ConsumeInfo> element.
NetworkDelayMultiplier
Specify the network delay multiplier (default = 100%) for a safety controller system. This value lets you reduce or
increase the connection reaction time limit in cases where the transport time of the message is significantly less or more
than the RPI. This may be the case when the RPI of an output connection is the same as that of a lengthy task period.
Type a percentage from 10...300, inclusive.
ReactionTimeLimit
Specify the connection reaction time limit for a safety controller system. The Logix Designer application calculates the
connection reaction time limit as a function of the RPI, timeout multiplier, and network delay multiplier. The connection
reaction time limit is automatically recalculated if any of the above values change.
MaxObservedNetworkDelay
L5X only. MaxObservedNetworkDelay is a measure of the longest time the data of a safety connection is delayed from
transporting the safety packets over the network. This attribute is exported for informational purposes only and is
ignored on import.
This attribute is on the <ConsumeInfo> element.
Unicast
For a safety consumed tag, specify if the EtherNet/IP connection is unicast. Specify yes for unicast or no to remain
multicast. For L5X format, specify true or false.
On export, only appears if the path to the producing module crosses an EtherNet/IP network and the producing module
supports unicast.
UnicastPermitted
For a safety produced tag, specify whether let the EtherNet/IP connection be unicast. Specify yes for unicast or no to
remain multicast. For L5X format, specify true or false.
Tag initial values
L5X initial tag value

In an .L5X file, place the initial value of the tag in the Data element. See Chapter 1
Data Formats on page 41 for more information on Data elements.
<Data>
initial_value
</Data>
If the tag is a string tag, specify a Format attribute.

<Data Format="String" Length="value">
<[CDATA[string text]]>
132
Chapter 6
</Data>
In L5X format, the string is padded with zeros (00) to fill its maximum of
82 characters.
L5K initial TAG value

In an .L5K file, place the initial value of the tag in the tag statement.
<tag_name> : <type> [(Attributes)][:= <initial_value>];
If the tag is a string tag, specify a STRING type.

<tag_name> : STRING := [<length>, string_text$00 ... $00];
The string is padded with zeros ($00) to fill its maximum of 82 characters.
Add-On Instruction tag values

The Logix Designer application optimizes user memory usage by minimizing
unused space in tags whose type is an Add-On Instruction data type.
The values for the Input & Output parameters are represented in the order as they
are listed in the Add-On Instruction definition. This rule applies to all parameter
data types except for BOOL. In order to reduce the data size of a tag of Add-On
Instruction type, BOOL parameters and BOOL local tags are collected and
packed in one or more hidden DINT members. Up to 32 BOOLs are packed into
each hidden DINT member. That is, the first BOOL is at bit 0, the second BOOL
is at bit 1. The hidden DINT members are located at the position where the 1st,
33rd, 65th, (n*32+1) BOOL is located. See the example.
The values for the local tags are represented in the order listed in the Add-On
Instruction definition except as noted here. BOOL local tags are packed with
BOOL parameters. In order to reduce the data size of an Add-On Instruction type
tag, SINT and INT tags may be repositioned.
This is done because all types except SINT and INT must be aligned on a fourbyte boundary. When a SINT precedes a DINT, there are three unused bytes
between the two members. To optimize memory usage, the unused space is filled
with other SINTs and/or INTs when possible. Note that the free space
optimization begins immediately after the last parameter. See the example.
133
Chapter 6
Add-On Instruction tag values example

This example demonstrates the tag memory layout of an Add-On Instruction
definition. The dashed lines show where the BOOL members are located in
memory. The solid lines indicate where a local member is repositioned to
minimize unused space.
The L5K representation of an Add-On Instruction type tag containing the example values is: [-2147483643, 101, 102.0, 103,
202, 204, [201.1, 201.2, 201.3], 2, 203].
Tag guidelines
The <unused1> memory area aligns the member, Par_2, on a 4-byte

boundary. All types except for SINT and INT must be aligned on a 4-byte
boundary. INTs must be aligned on a 2-byte boundary.
The <unused2> memory area pads the Add-On Instruction type tag such
that the byte length is a multiple of 4.
Unused data is not included in the L5K format. Unused data is included in
the L5X format.
The simplest way to guarantee that the order of the parameters and local
tags in the L5K Add-On Instruction definition matches the order of data
values in the L5K Add-On Instruction type tag is to order the tags in the
LOCAL_TAGS section such that all SINTs are first, followed by all INTs,
and everything else.
Observe these guidelines when defining a tag.
134
Tags must be defined after modules and add-on instructions. If there are no
modules or add-on instructions, then the tags must be defined after the data
types within the controller body.
Examples
Chapter 6
Base tags and aliases can be defined out of order within a tag block.
You cannot define a second dimension without a first dimension or a third

dimension without a second dimension.
The initial values must comply with the tag type and dimensions.
Whitespace cannot occur within the initial values in L5K format or within
the type/dimension specifier.
L5X tag example
L5K TAG examples

TAG
bits : MySint := [0];
dest : INT (RADIX := Decimal) := 0;
overflow OF bits.MyBit0 (RADIX := Binary);
source : REAL (RADIX := Exponential) := 0.0;
timer : TIMER[3] := [[0,0,100],[0,10,100],[0,0,50]];
END_TAG
This example shows forced tag data.

TAG
dint_a : DINT (RADIX := Decimal) := 0;
int_a : INT (RADIX := Decimal) := 0;
tag_a : UDT_A (ProduceCount := 2) := [0,0],
TagForceData := [0,0,0,0,1,0,-1,-1,1,0,-72,34];
135
Chapter 6
END_TAG
L5X safety tag example
L5K safety TAG examples
This example shows a consumed tag in a safety project.

safetyConsumed : mypcType (Class := Safety,
Producer := PeerSafetyController,
RemoteTag := productCount,
RemoteFile := 0,
RPI := 10,
IncludeConnectionStatus := Yes,
TimeoutMultiplier := 2,
136
Chapter 6
NetworkDelayMultiplier := 100,
ReactionTimeLimit := 29.952) := [[2],[0,0,0]],
TagForceData :=
[0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0];
This example shows a produced tag in a safety project:

safetyProduced : mypcType (Class := Safety,
ProduceCount := 3,
ProgrammaticallySendEventTrigger := Yes,
IncludeConnectionStatus := Yes) := [[0],[0,0,0]],
TagForceData :=
[0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0];
L5X ALARM_ANALOG and ALARM_DIGITAL tag examples
137
Chapter 6
138
Chapter 6
L5K ALARM_ANALOG and ALARM_DIGITAL tag examples
139
Chapter 7
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the Program component.
Program component
The Program component defines the programs used in the logic you export.
The maximum number of programs depends on the type of controller.
Controller
Maximum Number of Programs
ControlLogix
1000
(32 in firmware revisions prior to 15)
SoftLogix 5800
100
(32 in firmware revisions prior to 15)
FlexLogix
32
CompactLogix
32
DriveLogix
32
L5X program structure

<Programs>
<Program [Program_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]
</Description>
<Tags>
tags
</Tags>
<Routines>
routines
</Routines>
<ChildPrograms>
child_programs
</ChildPrograms>
</Program>
</Programs>
>
141
Chapter 7
L5K PROGRAM structure

PROGRAM <program_name> [(Description := "text",
Program_Attributes)]
[TAG declaration]
[ROUTINE declaration]
[FBD_ROUTINE declaration]
[SFC_ROUTINE declaration]
[ST_ROUTINE declaration]
[CHILD_PROGRAMS]
END_PROGRAM
Program elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
Not applicable
program_name
The name of the program.

In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Program> element.
Description
Description
User information about the program.
tags
TAG
Program-scoped tags.
Follows same format as controller-scoped tags.
For more details on defining a tag, see Chapter 6 Defining a Tag Component on page 107.
routines
ROUTINE
FBD_ROUTINE
ST_ROUTINE
SFC_ROUTINE
Routines within the program.

For more details on defining a:
Ladder logic routine, see Chapter 8 Defining a Ladder Logic Routine on page 151.
Function block diagram routine, see Chapter 9 defining a Function Block Diagram
Routine on page 163.
Sequential function chart routine, see Chapter 10 Defining a Sequential Function Chart
Routine on page 187.
Structured text routine, see Chapter 11 Defining a Structured Text Routine on page 209.
ChildPrograms
142
CHILD_PROGRAMS
Child programs of the parent program. The child-parent relationship is visible in only the
Logical Organizer in the Logix Designer application, and not in the Controller Organizer.
Chapter 7
Program attributes
Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the program.

Type
Specify the type of program. If this program is a Equipment Phase program, type EquipmentPhase. If this program is a
Sequence program, type Sequence. Otherwise, type Normal.
Class
Specify the class of the program. This attribute applies only to safety controller projects. Type Standard or Safety. Do
not use this attribute if the program is an Equipment Phase program.
(Type = EquipmentPhase).
Main (L5K)
MainRoutineName (L5X)
Specify the name of the main routine of the program (40 characters maximum).
Fault (L5K)
FaultRoutineName (L5X)
L5K only. Specify the name of the program fault routine, if any (40 characters maximum).
Mode
L5K only. Type 0 for not testing edits; type 1 for testing edits.
TestEdits
L5X only. Type false for not testing edits; type true for testing edits.
DisableFlag
L5K only. Type 1 to disable the program; type 0 to enable the program.
Disabled
L5X only. Type true to disable the program; type false to enable the program.
SynchronizeRedundancyData
AfterExecution
Type 1 to synchronize data after the program scan in a redundant system; type 0 to not synchronize data after the
program scan.
UseAsFolder
Type 1 to use the program as a folder. Logix Designer application does not execute any routines or update any
parameters in a program that is used as a folder.
Program attributes for EquipmentPhase programs

In addition to the program connection attributes previously described, an
Equipment Phase program (Program Type = EquipmentPhase) has the following
attributes.
Attribute
Description
PreState (L5K)
PreStateRoutineName (L5X)
L5K only. Specify the name of the prestate routine (40 characters maximum).
InitialStepIndex
Specify an integer value for the initial step index of the phase.
InitialState
Specify state of the phase. Type Aborted, Completed, Stopped, or Idle (default).
CompleteStateIfNotImpl
If the phase does not implement all the expected states, enter StateComplete (default) so the program
can continue to execute when it expects a state that was omitted. The program ignores the omitted
state and continues to the next state. Otherwise, enter NoAction.
LossOfCommCmd
If the phase uses an external sequencer, such as FactoryTalk Batch software, specify that appropriate
action to take if communication fails between the controller and the external sequencer. Type Abort,
Hold, Stop, or none (default).
143
Chapter 7
Attribute
Description
ExternalRequestAction
Specify how to handle an external request (PXRQ instruction) that is in process when the phase receives
the command to go to a Holding state. Type Clear to abort outstanding external requests. Otherwise,
type none (default).
EquipmentId
The FactoryTalk Batch equipment identifier for the Equipment Phase. This value is set by the FactoryTalk
Batch software when you synchronize with a project file. Do not modify this value.
RecipePhaseNames
The FactoryTalk Batch recipe phases for the Equipment Phase. This value is set by the FactoryTalk Batch
software when you synchronize with a project file. Do not modify this value.
AutoValueAssignStepToPhase
Specify whether the value of sequence step inputs are automatically assigned to phase inputs when a
sequence step starts the phase and the phase is used in a sequence.
In L5K, type Yes or No. In L5X, type true or false.
AutoValueAssignPhaseToStepOnComplete
Specify whether the value of phase outputs are automatically assigned to step outputs when the phase
is completed and the phase is used in a sequence.
AutoValueAssignPhaseToStepOnStopped
is stopped and the phase is used in a sequence.
AutoValueAssignPhaseToStepOnAborted
is stopped and the phase is used in a sequence.
Program attributes for Sequence programs

In addition to the program connection attributes previously described, a Sequence
program (Program Type = Sequence) has the following attributes.
Attribute
Description
Revision
Revision number for the program, consisting of major and minor revision.
RevisionExtension
Additional revision information.
UnitID
Numeric identifier to designate the equipment that the sequence is controlling.

Example value: 1-0x7FFFFFFF
RetainSequenceIDOnReset
Specify whether the sequence ID is retained when the sequence resets.

GenerateSequenceEvents
Specify whether the sequence events are generated.

144
ValuesToUseOnStart
Chapter 7
Specify the values of sequence parameters and step tags that are used when starting the sequence.
Use Initial Values Copy the initial values to the current values when starting the sequence.
Retain Current Values Use the current values of sequence parameters and step tags when
starting the sequence.
ValuesToUseOnReset
Specify the how the values of sequence parameters and step tags are set when the sequence
resets.
Use Initial Values Restore the current values of sequence parameters and step tags to the
initial values when resetting the sequence.
Retain Current Values Maintain the current values of sequence parameters and step tags
when resetting the sequence.
RevisionNote
Child program component
Optional detailed information about the revision.

For L5X, this is a sub element: <RevisionNote>.
The Child Program component defines the child programs used in the logic you
export. A child program is a program defined as the logical child of another
program in the Logical Organizer in the Logix Designer.
L5K CHILD_PROGRAM structure

PROGRAM <program_name> [(Description := "text",
Program_Attributes)]
[TAG declaration]
[ROUTINE declaration]
[FBD_ROUTINE declaration]
[SFC_ROUTINE declaration]
[ST_ROUTINE declaration]
[CHILD_PROGRAMS]
END_PROGRAM
L5X child program structure

<Programs>
<Program [Program_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]
</Description>
<Tags>
tags
</Tags>
<Routines>
routines
>
145
Chapter 7
</Routines>
<ChildPrograms>
child_programs
</ChildPrograms>
</Program>
</Programs>
Child program attributes

Attribute
Description
child_program_name
L5X only. Specify the name of the child program.

Child program guidelines

Observe these guidelines when defining a child program.
Encoded/Unencoded
routines
Since child programs are a way to organize existing programs, adding a child
program component does not add to the number of programs.
These examples are for protected (encoded) and unprotected (clear text) codes for
routines.
If the project contains a source-protected routine, the routine appears within an
encoded data component in the program. See Exporting Source-protected Logic
on page 28 on page 33 for procedures.
L5X EncodedData Structure

<EncodedData EncodedType= "type", Name="name",
Type="routinetype"
[,other_attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]] >
</Description>
encoded_data
</EncodedData>
146
Chapter 7
L5K ENCODED_DATA Structure

ENCODED_DATA [( EncodedType: type, Name:= name,
Type:= routinetype,
other_attributes)]
encoded_data
END_ENCODED_DATA
Encoded Data Elements

L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
type
type
The type of data encoded.

For L5K: ROUTINE
For L5X: Routine
name
name
The name of the protected routine.
routinetype
routinetype
The type of the routine protected (RLL, FBD, SFC, or ST).
other_attributes
other_attributes
Attributes of the routine that are not protected during export.
encoded_data
encoded_data
The protected portion of the routine.
Important:
When the routine is source protected, the encoded_data information is encrypted. If you modify this encrypted information, you will not be able to re-import
the routine.
L5K source protected routine example
L5X source-protected routine examples
147
Chapter 7
Program guidelines
Examples
148
Observe these guidelines when defining a program.
Define the main and fault attributes in any order.
You must put the tag declaration block before the routine block.
Define up to 1000 programs per task.
When you import a project:
All tag collection declaration blocks in a program definition block are

imported as local tags of a given program and are seen only by routines
under that program.
Program parameters are imported as parameters of a given program, but

are seen by other tags, parameters, and routines in the project.
Controller tags are seen by routines in any program.
L5X Program Example
Chapter 7
L5K PROGRAM Example
L5X Equipment Phase Program Example
149
Chapter 7
L5K Equipment Phase PROGRAM Example
150
Chapter 8
Introduction
This chapter explains how to enter ladder diagram logic in a complete

import/export file.
Ladder logic routine
These examples show the ladder logic routine structure.
L5X ladder logic routine structure

<Routines>
<Routine [Routine_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]
</Description>
<RLLContent>
logic
</RLLContent>
</Routine>
</Routines>
>
L5K Ladder Logic ROUTINE structure

ROUTINE <routine_name> [(Description := "text")]
<ladder_rungs>
END_ROUTINE
Ladder logic routine elements

L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
routine_name
The name of the routine.

In L5X, use a Name attribute in the <Routine> element.
Description
Description
User information about the routine.
RLLContent
ladder_rungs
Rung logic.
151
Chapter 8
RLL Routine attributes

Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the routine.

Type
L5X only. Specify RLL.

In L5K, the type of routine is part of the routine statement.
PermissionSet
Rung logic
Enter rung logic within a routine component in an import/export file.
L5X rung structure

<RLLContent>
<Rung [Rung_Attributes]>
<Comment>
<![CDATA[ comment_text ]] >
</Comment>
<Text >
<![CDATA[ rung_neutral_text; ] ] >
</Text>
</Rung>
</RLLContent>
L5K RUNG structure

RC: "comment" "more" "etc";
<RungType> : <rung_neutral_text>;
Rung elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
RungType
The type of rung.

In L5X, use a Type attribute on the <Rung> element.
Comment
RC
Rung comment.
In a L5K file, a rung comment must be followed by a rung.
Text
152
rung_neutral_text
The logic.
Chapter 8
These rung types are available.

Item
Identifies
Normal
Insert
Delete
IR
Insert with a replace
rR
Pending replace IR
Replace
rI
Pending replace I
rN
Pending replace N
Pending insert rung
er
Pending replace rung
Pending delete rung
Rung attributes
Attribute
Description
Number
L5X only. Specify the rung number within the routine.

In L5K, the rung number is defined by the order the rung appears in the L5K format.
Type
L5X only. Specify RLL.

In L5K, the type of rung is part of the rung statement.
Rung guidelines
Branches
Use these guidelines for rung logic:
Rungs are specified by using neutral language. See Neutral Text for Ladder
Instructions on page 156 on page 155 for the format for the supported
instructions.
Each rung ends with a semicolon (;)
Enter a single branch or simultaneous branches on a rung.
L5X branch structure

<Branch [BranchAttributes]>
<Leg [LegAttributes]/>
153
Chapter 8
</Branch>
L5K BRANCH structure

BRANCH (Branch_Attributes)
LEG (Leg_Attributes)
END_LEG
END_BRANCH
L5X Examples
L5X Ladder ROUTINE Example
L5K examples
Ladder ROUTINE example
154
Chapter 8
ROUTINE Ladder_example
RC: "This is a rung comment for the first rung.";
N: XIC(input1)XIC(input2)OTE(output1)OTE(output2);
RC: "This is a rung comment for the second rung.";
N: XIC(input3)OTE(output3);
END_ROUTINE
Example with a single branch
N: XIC(conveyor_a)[,XIC(input_1) XIO(input_2) ]OTE(light_1);
Example with two simultaneous branches
N: XIC(conveyor_b)[,XIC(input_1) XIO(input_2) ,XIC(input_a)
XIO(input_b) ]OTE(light_2);
Neutral text for ladder

instructions
These tables lists each ladder instruction and its neutral text format. For details
about a specific instruction, see the listed reference manuals.
Ladder Logic Instruction Reference Manuals
Instruction Type
Resource
Basic, sequential instruction
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Set Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM003.
Process control or drives

instruction
Logix5000 Controllers Advanced Process Control and Drives Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM006.
Motion instruction
Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instructions Reference Manual, publication MOTION-RM002.
Relay Ladder Instructions

Instruction
Neutral Text Format
ABL
ABL(channel,serial_port_control,character_count);
ABS
ABS(source,destination);
ACB
ACB(channel,serial_port_control,character_count);
ACL
ACL(channel,clear_serial_port_read,clear_serial_port_write);
ACS
ACS(source,destination);
ADD
ADD(source_A,source_B,destination);
AFI
AFI();
AHL
AHL(channel,ANDMask,ORMask,serial_port_control,channel_status);
ALMA
ALMA (alma_tag,in,program_acknowledge_all,program_disable,program_enable);
ALMD
ALMD (almd_tag,program_acknowledge,program_reset,program_disable,
program_enable);
AND
AND(source_A,source_B,destination);
ARD
ARD(channel,destination,serial_port_control,string_length,
characters_read);
ARL
ARL(channel,destination,serial_port_control,string_length,
characters_read);
ASN
ASN(source,destination);
ATN
ATN(source,destination);
155
Chapter 8
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
AVC
AVC(avc_tag,feedback_type,feedback_reation_time,delay_type,delay_time,
output_follows_actuate,actuate,delay_enable,feedback_1,input_status,
output_status,reset);
AVE
AVE(array,dim_to_vary,destination,control,length,position);
AWA
AWA(channel,source,serial_port_control,string_length,characters_sent);
AWT
AWT(channel,source,serial_port_control,string_length,characters_sent);
BRK
BRK();
BSL
BSL(array,control,source_bit,length);
BSR
BSR(array,control,source_bit,length);
BTD
BTD(source,source_bit,destination,destination_bit,length);
CBCM
CBCM(cbcm_tag,ack_type,mode,takeover_mode,enable,safety_enable,
standard_enable,arm_continuous,start,stop_at_top,press_in_motion,
motion_monitor_fault,slide_zone,safety_enable_ack)
CBIM
CBIM(cbim_tag,ack_type,inch_time,enable,safety_enable,standard_enable,
start,press_in_motion,motion_monitor_fault,slide_zone,safety_enable_ack);
CBSSM
CBSSM(cbssm_tag,ack_type,takeover_mode,enable,safety_enable,
standard_enable,start,press_in_motion,motion_monitor_fault,slide_zone,
saefty_enable_ack);
CLR
CLR(destination);
CMP
CMP(expression);
CONCAT
CONCAT(sourceA,sourceB,destination)
COP
COP(source,destination,length);
COS
COS(source,destination);
CPM
CPM(cpm_tag,cam_profile,enable,brake_cam,takeover_cam,dynamic_cam,
input_status,reverse,press_motion_status,reset);
CPS
CPS(source,destination,length);
CPT
CPT(destination,expression);
CROUT
CROUT(crout_tag,feedback_type,feedback_reaction_time,actuate,feedback_1,
feedback_2,input_status,output_status,reset);
CSM
CSM(csm_tag,mechanical_delay_timer,max_pulse_period,motion_request,
channel_A,channel_B,input_status,reset);
CTD
CTD(counter,preset,accum);
CTU
CTU(counter,preset,accum);
DCM
DCM(dcm_tag,safety_function,input_type,descrepancy_time,channel_A,
channel_B,input_status,reset);
DCS
DCS(dcs_tag,safety_function,input_type,discrepancy_time,restart_type,
cold_start_type,channel_A,channel_B,input_status,reset);
DCSRT
DCSRT(dcsrt_tag,safety_function,input_type,discrepancy_time,enable,
channel_A,channel_B,input_status,reset);
DCST
DCST(dcst_tag,safety_function,input_type,discrepancy_time,restart_type,
cold_start_type,channel_A,channel_B,test_request,input_status,reset);
DCSTM
DCSTM(dcstm_tag,safety_function,input_type,discrepancy_time,restart_type,
cold_start_type,test_type,test_time,channel_A,channel_B,test_request,mute,
muting_lamp_status,input_status,reset);
156
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
DCSTL
DCSTL(dcstl_tag,safety_function,input_type,discrepancy_time,restart_type,
cold_start_type,channel_A,channel_B,test_request,unlock_request,
lock_feedback,hazard_stopped,input_status,reset);
DDT
DDT(source,reference,result,cmp_control,length,position,result_control,
length,position);
DEG
DEG(source,destination);
DELETE
DELETE(source,quantity,start,destination);
DIN
DIN(din_tag,reset_type,channel_A,channel_B,circuit_reset,fault_reset);
DIV
DIV(source_A,source_B,destination);
DTOS
DTOS(source,destination);
DTR
DTR(source,mask,reference);
ENPEN
ENPEN(enpen_tag,reset_type,channel_A,channel_B,circuit_reset,fault_reset);
EOT
EOT(data_bit);
EPMS
EPMS(epms_tag,input_1,input_2,input_3,input_4,input_5,input_6,input_7,
input_8,input_status,lock,reset);
EQU
EQU(source_A,source_B);
ESTOP
ESTOP(estop_tag,reset_type,channel_A,channel_B,circuit_reset,fault_reset);
EVENT
EVENT(task);
FAL
FAL(control,length,position,mode,destination,expression);
FBC
FBC(source,reference,result,cmp_control,length,position,result_control,
length,position);
FFL
FFL(source,FIFO,control,length,position);
FFU
FFU(FIFO,destination,control,length,position);
FIND
FIND(source,search,start,result);
FLL
FLL(source,destination,length);
FOR
FOR(routine_name,index,initial_value,terminal_value,step_size);
FPMS
FPMS(fpms_tag,input_1,input_2,input_3,input_4,input_5,fault_reset);
FRD
FRD(source,destination);
FSBM
FSBM(fsbm_tag,restart_type,S1-S2_time,S2-LC_time,LC-S3_time,S3-S4_time,
maximum_mute_time,maximum_override_time,direction,light_curtain,sensor_1,
sensor_2,sensor_3,sensor_4,enable_mute,override,input_status,
muting_lamp_status,reset);
FSC
FSC(control,length,position,mode,expression);
GEQ
GEQ(source_A,source_B);
GRT
GRT(source_A,source_B);
GSV
GSV(class_name,instance_name,attribute_name,destination);
INSERT
INSERT(sourceA,sourceB,start,destination);
IOT
IOT(output_tag);
JMP
JMP(label_name);
JSR
JSR(routine_name,input_1,...input_n,return_1,..return_n);
JXR
JXR(external_routine_name,external_routine_control,parameter,
return_parameter);
Chapter 8
157
Chapter 8
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
LBL
LBL(label_name);
LC
LC(lc_tag,reset_type,channel_A,channel_B,input_filter_time,
mute_light_curtain,circuit_reset,fault_reset);
LEQ
LEQ(source_A,source_B);
LES
LES(source_A,source_B);
LFL
LFL(source,LIFO,control,length,position);
LFU
LFU(LIFO,destination,control,length,position);
LIM
LIM(low_limit,test,high_limit);
LN
LN(source,destination);
LOG
LOG(source,destination);
LOWER
LOWER(source,destination);
MAAT
MAAT(axis,motion_control);
MAFR
MAFR(axis,motion_control);
MAG
MAG(slave_axis,master_axis,motion_control,direction,ratio,slave_counts,master_counts,master_reference,ratio_format,clutch,accel_rate,accel_
units);
MAH
MAH(axis,motion_control);
MAHD
MAHD(axis,motion_control,diagnostic_test,observed_direction);
MAJ
MAJ(axis,motion_control,direction,speed,speed_units,accel_rate,
accel_units,decel_rate,decel_units,profile,merge,merge_speed);
MAM
MAM(axis,motion_control,move_type,position,speed,speed_units,accel_rate, accel_units,decel_rate,decel_units,profile,merge,merge_speed);
MAOC
MAOC(axis,execution_target,motion_control,output,input,output_cam,
cam_start_position,cam_end_position,output_compensation,execution_mode,
execution_schedule,axis_arm_position,cam_arm_position,reference);
MAPC
MAPC(slave_axis,master_axis,motion_control,direction,cam_profile,
slave_scaling,master_scaling,execution_mode,execution_schedule,
master_lock_position,cam_lock_position,master_reference,
master_direction);
MAR
MAR(axis,motion_control,trigger_condition,windowed_registration,
minimum_position,maximum_position);
MAS
MAS(axis,motion_control,stop_type,change_decel,decel_rate,decel_units);
MASD
MASD(axis,motion_control);
MASR
MASR(axis,motion_control);
MATC
MATC(axis,motion_control,direction,cam_profile,distance_scaling,
time_scaling,execution_mode,execution_schedule);
MAW
MAW(axis,motion_control,trigger_condition,position);
MCCD
MCCD(coordinate_system,motion_control,motion_type,change_speed,speed,
speed_units,change_accel,accel_rate,accel_units,change_decel,decel_rate, decel_units,scope);
MCCM
MCCM(coordinate_system,motion_control,move_type,position,circle_type,
via/center/radius,direction,speed,speed_units,accel_rate,accel_units,
decel_rate,decel_units,profile,termination_type,merge,merge_speed);
MCCP
MCCP(motion_control,cam,length,start_slope,end_slope,cam_profile);
MCLM
MCLM(coordinate_system,motion_control,move_type,position,speed,
speed_units,accel_rate,accel_units,decel_rate,decel_units,profile, termination_type,merge,merge_speed);
158
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
MCD
MCD(axis,motion_control,motion_type,change_speed,speed,change_accel,
accel_rate,change_decel,decel_rate,speed_units,accel_units,
decel_units);
MCR
MCR();
MCS
MCS(coordinate_system,motion_control,stop_type,change_decel,decel_rate, decel_units);
MCSD
MCSD(coordinate_system,motion_control);
MCSR
MCSR(coordinate_system,motion_control);
MCSV
MCSV(motion_control,cam_profile,master_value,slave_value,slope_value,
slope_derivative);
MCT
MCT(source_system,target_system,motion_control,orientation,translation);
MCTP
MCTP(source_system,target_system,motion_control,orientation,translation,
transform_direction,reference_position,transform_position);
MDF
MDF(axis,motion_control);
MDO
MDO(axis,motion_control,drive_output,drive_units);
MDOC
MDOC(axis,execution_target,motion_control,disarm_type);
MDR
MDR(axis,motion_control);
MDW
MDW(axis,motion_control);
MEQ
MEQ(source,mask,compare);
MGS
MGS(group,motion_control,stop_mode);
MGSD
MGSD(group,motion_control);
MGSP
MGSP(group,motion_control);
MGSR
MGSR(group,motion_control);
MID
MID(source,quantity,start,destination);
MMVC
MMVC(mmvc_tag,enable,keyswitch,bottom,flywheel_stopped,safety_enable,
actuate,input_status,output_status,reset);
MOD
MOD(source_A,source_B,destination);
MOV
MOV(source,destination);
MRAT
MRAT(axis,motion_control);
MRHD
MRHD(axis,motion_control,diagnostic_test);
MRP
MRP(axis,motion_control,type,position_select,position);
MSF
MSF(axis,motion_control);
MSG
MSG(message_control);
MSO
MSO(axis,motion_control);
MUL
MUL(source_A,source_B,destination);
MVC
MVC(mvc_tag,feedback_type,feedback_reaction_time,actuate,feedback_1,
feedback_2,input_status,output_status,reset);
MVM
MVM(source,mask,destination);
NEG
NEG(source,destination);
NEQ
NEQ(source_A,source_B);
NOP
NOP();
NOT
NOT(source,destination);
Chapter 8
159
Chapter 8
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
ONS
ONS(storage_bit);
OR
OR(source_A,source_B,destination);
OSF
OSF(storage_bit,output_bit);
OSR
OSR(storage_bit,output_bit);
OTE
OTE(data_bit);
OTL
OTL(data_bit);
OTU
OTU(data_bit);
PATT
PATT(phase_name,result);
PCLF
PCLF(phase_name);
PCMD
PCMD(phase_name,command,result);
PDET
PDET(phase_name);
PFL
PFL(source);
PID
PID(PID,process_variable,tieback,control_variable,pid_master_loop,
inhold_bit,inhold_value);
POVR
POVR(phase_name,command,result);
PPD
PPD();
PRNP
PRNP();
PSC
PSC();
PXRQ
PXRQ(phase_instruction,external_request,data_value);
RAD
RAD(source,destination);
RES
RES(structure);
RET
RET(return_1,...return_n);
RIN
RIN(rin_tag,reset_type,channel_A,channel_B,circuit_reset,fault_reset);
ROUT
ROUT(rout_tag,feedback_type,enable,feedback_1,feedback_2,fault_reset);
RTO
RTO(timer,preset,accum);
RTOS
RTOS(source,destination)
SBR
SBR(routine_name,input_1,...input_n);
SFP
SFP(SFC_routine_name,target_state);
SFR
SFR(SFC_routine_name,step_name);
SIN
SIN(source,destination);
SIZE
SIZE(souce,dimension_to_vary,size);
SMAT
SMAT(smat_tag,restart_type,short_circuit_detect_delay_time,channel_A,
channel_B,input_status,reset);
SQI
SQI(array,mask,source,control,length,position);
SQL
SQL(array,source,control,length,position);
SQO
SQO(array,mask,destination,control,length,position);
SQR
SQR(source,destination);
SRT
SRT(array,dim_to_vary,control,length,position);
SSV
SSV(class_name,instance_name,attribute_name,source);
STD
STD(array,dim_to_vary,destination,control,length,position);
160
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
STOD
STOD(source,destination)
STOR
STOR(source,destination)
SUB
SUB(source_A,source_B,destination);
SWPB
SWPB(source,order_mode,destination);
TAN
TAN(source,destination);
THRS
THRS(thrs_tag,active_pin_type,active_pin,right_button_normally_open,
right_button_normally_closed,left_button_normally_open,
left_button_normally_closed,fault_reset);
THRSE
THRSE(thrse_tag,discprepancy_time,enable,disconnected,
right_button_normally_open,right_button_normally_closed,
left_button_normally_open,left_button_normally_closed,input_status,resest);
TND
TND();
TOD
TOD(source,destination);
TOF
TOF(timer,preset,accum);
TON
TON(timer,preset,accum);
TRN
TRN(source,destination);
TSAM
TSAM(tsam_tag,restart_type,S1-S2_time,S2-LC_time,maximum_mute_time,
maximum_override_time,light_curtain,sensor_1,sensor_2,enable_mute,
override,input_status,muting_lamp_status,reset);
TSSM
TSSM(tssm_tag,restart_type,S1-S2_discrepancy_time,S1_S2-LC_minimum_time,
S1_S2-LC_maximum_time,maximum_mute_time,maximum_override_time,
light_curtain,sensor_1,sensor_2,enable_mute,override,input_status,
muting_lamp_status,reset);
UID
UID();
UIE
UIE();
UPPER
UPPER(source,destination);
XIC
XIC(data_bit);
XIO
XIO(data_bit);
XOR
XOR(source_A,source_B,destination);
XPY
XPY(source_A,source_B,destination);
Chapter 8
161
Chapter 9
Define a function block diagram routine
Introduction
This chapter explains how to enter function block diagram logic in a complete
import/export file.
Function BlockDiagram
Routine
These examples show the function block routine structure.
L5X function block diagram routine structure

<Routines>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<FBDContent [FBDContent_Attributes]>
<Sheet [Sheet_Attributes]>
logic
</Sheet>
</FBDContent>
</Routine>
</Routines>
L5K Function Block FBD_ROUTINE structure

FBD_ROUTINE <routine_name> [(Description := "text",
Routine_attributes, FBD_Attributes)]
<function block sheets>
END_FBD_ROUTINE
Function block routine elements

L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
N/A
routine_name

In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Routine> element.
Description
Description
FBDContent
function block sheets
Function block diagram logic.
163
Chapter 9
FBD_routine attributes
Attribute
Description
Name

Type
L5X only. Specify FBD.

SheetSize
Select one of these sizes.

Letter (8.5x11in)
Legal (8.5x14in)
Tabloid (11x17in)
A4 (210x297mm)
A3 (297x420mm)
For L5X, this attribute is on the <FBDContent> element.
SheetOrientation
Select the orientation of the sheet as Portrait or Landscape.

OnlineEditType
L5X only. Specify the online edit logic type (Original, PendingEdits, or TestEdits). This attribute is not
specified if there are no edits.
PermissionSet
Sheet
Enter the function block diagram logic in sheets within a routine component in an
import/export file.
L5X sheet structure

<Sheet [Sheet_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<IRef [Iref_Attributes]/>
<ORef [Oref_Attributes]/>
<ICon [Icon_Attributes]/>
<OCon [Ocon_Attributes]/>
<Block [Block_Attributes]/>
164
Chapter 9
<AddOnInstruction [AddOnInstruction_Attributes]/>
<JSR [JSR_Attributes]/>
<SBR [SBR_Attributes]/>
<RET [RET_Attributes]/>
<Wire [Wire_Attributes]/>
<FeedbackWire [FeedbackWire_Attributes]/>
<TextBox [TextBox_Attributes]>
text
</TextBox>
<Attachment [Attachment_Attributes]/>
</Sheet>
L5K SHEET structure

SHEET (Name := <sheet_name>)
<IREF declaration>
<OREF declaration>
<ICON declaration>
<OCON declaration>
<mnemonic_BLOCK declaration>
<ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION declaration>
<JSR declaration>
<SBR declaration>
<RET declaration>
<WIRE declaration>
<FEEDBACK_WIRE declaration>
<TEXT_BOX declaration>
<ATTACHMENT declaration>
END_SHEET
Sheet elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
IRef
IREF
Input references.
ORef
OREF
Output references.
ICon
ICON
Input wire connectors.
OCon
OCON
Output wire connectors.
Block
mnemonic_BLOCK
Function block instructions and their locations.
AddOnInstruction
ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION
Add-On Instructions
JSR
JSR
Jump to Subroutine instructions.
SBR
SBR
Subroutine instructions.
RET
RET
Return instructions.
Wire
WIRE
Wires and their corresponding attachments
FeedbackWire
FEEDBACK_WIRE
Feedback wires and what they are attached to.
165
Chapter 9
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
TextBox
TEXT_BOX
Text box to hold comments.
Attachment
ATTACHMENT
Attachment from a text box to another function block element.
Sheet attributes
Attribute
Description
Number
L5X only. Specify the number of the sheet.

In L5K, the sheet number is determined by the order the SHEET statement appears in the L5K format.
Name
L5K only. Specify the name of the sheet.

In L5X, the name of the sheet is specified in a <Description> element under the <Sheet> element.
Sheet guidelines
Use these sheet guidelines in your import/export files:
166
The sheets in the routine appear in order in the export file. Each sheet
section contains all the drawing elements and wires for that sheet.
On import, sheet numbers are assigned based on order in the file, not on the
number attribute on the sheet.
The sheet name is stored as description on the sheet.
Input references, blocks, output references, special drawing elements, and

wires are contained within the sheet. On export, the elements appear in the
order shown. On import in the L5K format, elements can be interspersed in
the file. On import in the L5X format, the elements must appear in the
exported order.
Wire and feedback wire statements must appear after all the other
components.
Be careful when copying and pasting function block components within an

import/export file. Each component within a sheet must have a unique ID
number within that sheet.
Export function block logic

while editing online
Chapter 9
If you export function block logic that contains online edits, the export file
exports LOGIC blocks, in L5K format, or additional <FBDContent> elements,
in L5X format, to indicate the original, test edits, and pending edits states. If there
are no online edits, these LOGIC blocks or additional <FBDContent> elements
are not shown.
L5X Example: Test Edits and Pending Edits Exist
L5K Example 1: Both Test Edits and Pending Edits Exist

FBD_ROUTINE MyFbdRoutine (SheetSize := "Letter (8.5x11in)",
LOGIC (Online_Edit_Type := Orig)
(* Sheets inserted here - see format described
above *)
END_LOGIC
LOGIC (Online_Edit_Type := Test)
above *)
END_LOGIC
LOGIC (Online_Edit_Type := Pend)
above *)
END_LOGIC
END_FBD_ROUTINE
L5K Example 2: Only Pending Edits Exist
FBD_ROUTINE MyFbdRoutine (SheetSize := "Letter (8.5x11in)",
above *)
END_LOGIC
167
Chapter 9

above *)
END_LOGIC
END_FBD_ROUTINE
Online Edit Types

Item
Identifies
Online_Edit_Type
If online edits exist when the logic is exported, there will be a LOGIC block for Online_Edit_Type := Orig and the appropriate LOGIC block
for the existing edits. Online_Edit_Type : = Pend indicates pending edits. Online_Edit_Type := Test indicates test edits.
If there are no online edits when the logic is exported, there are no LOGIC blocks and the main components in the routine are SHEET
components.
Input and output references have similar formats and identical attributes.
Input and output

references
L5X IREFand OREF structure

<IRef [Reference_Attributes]/>
<ORef [Reference_Attributes]/>
L5K IREF and OREF structure

IREF (Reference_Attributes)
END_IREF
OREF (Reference_Attributes)
END_OREF
Reference attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The element identifier; uniqueness is important for wiring.

Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
X-coordinates on internal grid.

Y-coordinates on internal grid.

Operand
Operand
Function block instruction.
168
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
HideDesc
HideDescription
Whether or not to hide the description. Specify true or false.
Chapter 9
Reference guidelines
Use these reference guidelines for function blocks:
Input and output

connectors
If the operand is not a qualified tag or literal value, the reference is not
verified.
Input and output wire connectors have similar formats and identical attributes.
L5X ICON and OCON structure

<ICon [Connector_Attributes]/>
<OCon [Connector_Attributes]/>
L5K ICON and OCON structure

ICON (Connector_Attributes)
END_ICON
OCON (Connector_Attributes)
END_OCON
Connector attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID



Name
Name
(optional) The name of the wire connector.
169
Chapter 9
Connector guidelines
Use these connector guidelines for function blocks:
Blocks
Output connector names must be unique within a function block routine.
Multiple input connector names can reference the same output connector
name.
Input and output connectors with unmatched or blank connector names

are not verified.
These examples show block structure.
L5X block structure

<Block [Block_Attributes]>
<Array Name="name", Operand="operand"/>
</Block>
L5K BLOCK structure

mnemonic_BLOCK (Block_Attributes)
END_mnemonic_BLOCK
Block attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
Type
mnemonic
L5X only. The type of Block. Specify the mnemonic name for the block (for example DEDT).
ID
ID



Operand
Operand
(optional) Tag name for the block.

For L5X, this attribute is on the <Array> element.
170
Chapter 9
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
Name
ArrayName
(optional) Tag name for array.

For L5X , this attribute is on the <Array> element.
VisiblePins
VisiblePins
List of the names of all the parameters with pins visible for wiring. The names match the
member names on the block tag.
In an .L5X file, separate pin names with spaces.
In an .L5K file, separate pin names with commas.
AutotuneTag
AutotuneTag
Tag name for the autotune tag.
HideDesc
HideDescription
Whether or not to hide the description. Specify true or false.
Block guidelines
Use these block guidelines with function blocks:
If the operand is not a qualified tag of the correct data type, the blocks are
not verified.
Some function block instructions require specific arrays. The table lists the
valid array name for each of these instructions.
Add-On instructions
Instruction
Array Name
DEDT
Storage (required)
FGEN
X1 (required)
Y1 (required)
X2 (optional)
Y2 (optional)
MAVE
Storage (required)
Weight (optional)
RMPS
RampValue (required)
SoakValue (required)
SoakTime (required)
The X and Y grid locations are in a relative position from the upper-left
corner of the sheet. X is the horizontal position; Y is the vertical position.
The Add-On Instruction elements in a function block diagram routine structure

represent the use of the Add-On Instruction in the routine, not the definition of
the Add-On Instruction.
L5X Add-On Instruction structure

<AddOnInstruction [AddOnInstruction_Attributes]>
171
Chapter 9
<InOutParameter Name="InOutArgument", Argument="argument"/>

</Add0nInstruction>
L5K ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION structure

ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION name (Add_On_Instruction_Attributes)
FBD_PARAMETERS (InOutParmName := InOutArgument, ...)
END_FBD_PARAMETERS
END_ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION
Add-On Instruction Attributes

L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
Name
name
L5X only. Specify the name of the Add-On Instruction.

ID
ID



Operand
Operand
(optional) Operand name for the Add-On Instruction block.
VisiblePins
VisiblePins
List of the names of all the parameters with pins visible for wiring.
In an .L5X file, separate pin names with spaces.
In an .L5K file, separate pin names with commas.
Name
N/A
L5X only. Specify the tag name for the InOut Parameter on the Add-On Instruction
For L5X, this attribute is on the <InOutParameter> element.
For L5K, the InOut Parameter name is one of the attribute names on the FBD_PARAMETERS
statement.
Argument
N/A
L5X only. Specify the InOut Parameter argument.

For L5X, this attribute is on the <InOutParameter> element.
Add-On Instruction Guidelines

Use these Add-On Instruction guidelines with function blocks:
172
Chapter 9
If the operand is not a qualified tag or literal value, the Add-On Instruction
is not verified.
JSR
L5X JSR structure
<JSR [JSR_Attributes]>
</JSR>
L5K JSR structure

JSR (JSR_Attributes)
END_JSR
JSR attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID



Routine
Routine
Specify the JSR routine name.
In
In
Specify the input parameters.

In an .L5X file, separate input parameter names with spaces.
In an .L5K file, separate input parameter names with commas.
Ret
Ret
Specify the return parameters.

In an .L5X file, separate return parameter names with spaces.
In an .L5K file, separate return parameter names with commas.
JSR guidelines
The X and Y grid locations are a relative position from the upper-left corner of the
sheet. X is the horizontal position; Y is the vertical position.
173
Chapter 9
L5X SBR structure
SBR
<SBR [SBR_Attributes]>
</SBR>
L5K SBR structure

SBR (SBR_Attributes)
END_SBR
SBR attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID



Routine
Routine
Specify the SBR routine name.
Ret
Ret
Specify the return parameters.

In an .L5X file, separate return parameter names with spaces.
In an .L5K file, separate return parameter names with commas.
SBR guidelines
RET
L5X RET structure

<RET [RET_Attributes]>
</RET>
L5K RET structure

RET (RET_Attributes)
END_RET
174
Chapter 9
RET attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID



Routine
Routine
Specify the JSR routine name.
In
In
Specify the input parameters.

In an .L5X file, separate input parameter names with spaces.
In an .L5K file, separate input parameter names with commas.
RET guidelines
Wires and feedback wires
The wire and feedback wire formats describe a wire by specifying what it is
attached to at each end, which is always a pin on another drawing element.
L5X wire structure

<Wire [Wire_Attributes]/>
<FeedbackWire [Wire_Attributes]/>
L5K WIRE structure

WIRE (Wire_Attributes)
END_WIRE
FEEDBAK_WIRE (Wire_Attributes)
END_FEEDBACK_WIRE
175
Chapter 9
Wire attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
FromID
FromElementID
The source drawing element.

Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer.
FromParam
FromParameter
The pin on the source drawing element.

For:
Blocks
Irefs
Icons
Type:
Parameter name
In
In
ToID
ToElementID
The destination drawing element.

Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer.
ToParam
ToParameter
The pin on the destination drawing element.

For:
Blocks
Orefs
Ocons
Type:
Parameter name
Out
Out
Wire guidelines
Use these wire guidelines:
Text boxes
Wires that are not correctly specified are not imported.
A feedback wire follows the same format as a wire. Just connect the Source
and Destination elements to form a feedback wire.
The text box blocks in an SFC routine hold descriptions about SFC components.
L5X TextBox structure

<TextBox [TextBoxAttributes]>
<![CDATA[ text ]] >
</TextBox>
L5K TEXTBOX structure

TEXT_BOX (Text_Box_Attributes,
Text := <"text">)
END_TEXT_BOX
176
Chapter 9
Text box attributes

L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID



Width
Width
This attribute is not currently used; it is there for future use. Type 0.
Text
Text
The descriptive text.
Text box guidelines

Use these guidelines for text boxes:
Attachments
All text box blocks must come after all block sections.
Text boxes can be free-standing or they can be attached to FBD elements.
The attachment blocks identify the attachments from text boxes to other function
block elements.
L5X attachment structure

L5K ATTACHMENT structure

ATTACHMENT (Attachment_Attributes)
END_ATTACHMENT
Attachment attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
FromID
FromElementID
The ID of the attached object. Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
ToID
ToElementID
The ID of the object that the FromID object is attached to. Type an
unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
177
Chapter 9
Attachment guidelines
Use these guidelines for attachments:
178
Use an attachment to link a text box to an FBD element.
All attachment blocks must come after all text box blocks.
Examples
Chapter 9
L5X Function Block Diagram Example
179
Chapter 9
L5K FBD_ROUTINE Example

FBD_ROUTINE My_FBD_Routine (SheetSize := "Tabloid (11x17in)",
SHEET (Name := Input_Scaling)
IREF (ID := 3,
X := 120,
Y := 120,
Operand := Input_Tag)
END_IREF
OREF
(ID := 5,
X := 520,
Y := 320,
Operand := Output_Tag)
END_OREF
ICON
(ID := 4,
X := 160,
Y := 320,
Name := ConnectorName)
END_ICON
OCON
(ID := 6,
X := 680,
Y := 100,
Name := ConnectorName)
END_OCON
MUL_BLOCK
(ID := 0,
X := 440,
Y := 60,
Operand := MUL_01,
VisiblePins := "SourceA, SourceB,
Dest")
END_MUL_BLOCK
SCL_BLOCK
(ID := 1,
X := 240,
Y := 60,
Operand := SCL_01,
VisiblePins := "In, InEUMax, Out,
MaxAlarm")
END_SCL_BLOCK
PI_BLOCK
180
(ID := 2,
X := 260,
Y := 260,
Operand := PI_01,
VisiblePins := "In, Initialize,
Chapter 9
InitialValue, Out, HighAlarm, LowAlarm")

END_PI_BLOCK
WIRE
(FromElementID := 3,
FromParameter := "",
ToElementID := 1,
ToParameter := In)
END_WIRE
WIRE
FromParameter := "",
ToElementID := 2,
ToParameter := In)
END_WIRE
WIRE
FromParameter := Dest,
ToElementID := 6,
ToParameter := "")
END_WIRE
WIRE
FromParameter := Out,
ToElementID := 0,
ToParameter := SourceA)
END_WIRE
WIRE
FromParameter := Out,
ToElementID := 5,
ToParameter := "")
END_WIRE
FEEDBACK_WIRE
FromParameter := Dest,
ToElementID := 0,
ToParameter := SourceB)
END_FEEDBACK_WIRE
END_SHEET
END_FBD_ROUTINE
Parameters for function

block instructions
These tables list each function block instruction and its format in the Block
component of an import/export file. For details about a specific instruction, see
the listed reference manuals.
181
Chapter 9
Function block instruction reference manuals

Instruction Type
Resource

instruction
Logix5000 Controllers Advanced Process Control and Drives Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication1756-RM006.
Motion instruction
Function block instructions

Instruction
Default Operand and VisiblePins formats (components within the Block structure)
ABS
Operand := ABS_01,
VisiblePins := "Source, Destination")
ACS
Operand := ACS_01,
ADD
Operand := ADD_01,
VisiblePins := "SourceA, SourceB, Destination")
ALM
Operand := ALM_01,
VisiblePins := "In, HHAlarm, HAlarm, LAlarm, LLAlarm, ROCPosAlarm, ROCNegAlarm")
ALMA
Operand := ALMA_01,
VisiblePins := "In, HHInAlarm, HInAlarm, LInAlarm, LLInAlarm, ROCPosInAlarm, ROCNegInAlarm, HHAcked, HAcked, LAcked, LLAcked, ROCPosAcked,
ROCNegAcked, Suppressed, Disabled")
ALMD
Operand := ALMD_01,
VisiblePins := "In, InAlarm, Acked, Suppressed, Disabled")
AND
Operand := AND_01,
VisiblePins := "SourceA, SourceB, Destination")
ASN
Operand := ASN_01,
ATN
Operand := ATN_01,
BAND
Operand := BAND_01,
VisiblePins := "In1, In2, In3, In4, Out")
BNOT
Operand := BNOT_01,
VisiblePins := "In, Out")
BOR
Operand := BOR_01,
VisiblePins := "In1, In2, In3, In4, Out")
BTDT
Operand := BTDT_01,
VisiblePins := "Source, SourceBit, Length, DestBit, Target, Dest")
BXOR
Operand := BXOR_01,
VisiblePins := "In1, In2, Out")
COS
Operand := COS_01,
VisiblePins := "Source, Dest")
CTUD
Operand := CTUD_01,
VisiblePins := "CUEnable, CDEnable, PRE, Reset, ACC, DN")
182
Chapter 9
Instruction
D2SD
Operand := D2SD_01,
VisiblePins := "ProgCommand, State0Perm, State1Perm, FB0, FB1, HandFB, ProgProgReq, ProgOperReq, ProgOverrideReq, ProgHandReq, Out,
Device0State, Device1State, CommandStatus, FaultAlarm, ModeAlarm, ProgOper, Override, Hand")
D3SD
Operand := D3SD_01,
VisiblePins := "Prog0Command, Prog1Command, Prog2Command, State0Perm, State1Perm, State2Perm, FB0, FB1, FB2, FB3, HandFB0, HandFB1,
HandFB2, ProgProgReq, ProgOperReq, ProgOverrideReq, ProgHandReq, Out0, Out1, Out2, Device0State, Device1State, Device2State,
Command0Status, Command1Status, Command2Status, FaultAlarm, ModeAlarm, ProgOper, Override, Hand")
DEDT
Operand := DEDT_01,
VisiblePins := "In, Out",
Storage := array_name)
DEG
Operand := DEG_01,
DERV
Operand := DERV_01,
VisiblePins := "In, ByPass, Out")
DFF
Operand := DFF_01,
VisiblePins := "D, Clear, Clock, Q, QNot")
DIV
Operand := DIV_01,
VisiblePins := "SourceA, SourceB, Dest")
ESEL
Operand := ESEL_01,
VisiblePins := "In1, In2, In3, In4, In5, In6, ProgSelector, ProgProgReq, ProgOperReq, ProgOverrideReq, Out, SelectedIn, ProgOper, Override")
EQU
Operand := EQU_01,
VisiblePins := "SourceA, SourceB")
FGEN
Operand := FGEN_01,
X1 := array_name,
X2 := array_name,
Y2 := array_name,
Y2 := array_name)
FRD
Operand := FRD_01,
GEQ
Operand := GEQ_01,
GRT
Operand := GRT_01,
HLL
Operand := HLL_01,
VisiblePins := "In, Out, HighAlarm, LowAlarm")
HPF
Operand := HPF_01,
INTG
Operand := INTG_01,
JKFF
Operand := JKFF_01,
VisiblePins := "Clear, Clock, Q, QNot")
LEQ
Operand := LEQ_01,
183
Chapter 9
Instruction
LES
Operand := LES_01,
LIM
Operand := LIM_01,
VisiblePins := "LowLlimit, Test, HighLimit")
LN
Operand := LN_01,
LOG
Operand := LOG_01,
LPF
Operand := LPF_01,
MAVE
Operand := MAVE_01,
Storage := array_name,
Weight := array_name)
MAXC
Operand := MAXC_01,
VisiblePins := "In, Reset, ResetValue, Out")
MEQ
Operand := MEQ_01,
VisiblePins := "Source, Mask, Compare")
MINC
Operand := MINC_01,
VisiblePins := "In, Reset, ResetValue, Out")
MOD
Operand := MOD_01,
MSTD
Operand := MSTD_01,
VisiblePins := "In, SampleEnable, Out",
Storage := array_name)
MUL
Operand := MUL_01,
MUX
Operand := MUX_01,
VisiblePins := "In1, In2, In3, In4, In5, In6, In7, In8, Selector, Out")
MVMT
Operand := MVMT_01,
VisiblePins := "Source, Mask, Target, Dest")
NEG
Operand := NEG_01,
NEQ
Operand := NEQ_01,
NOT
Operand := NOT_01,
NTCH
Operand := NTCH_01,
OR
Operand := OR_01,
OSFI
Operand := OSFI_01,
VisiblePins := "InputBit, OutputBit")
184
Chapter 9
Instruction
OSRI
Operand := OSRI_01,
VisiblePins := "InputBit, OutputBit")
PI
Operand := PI_01,
PIDE
Operand := PIDE_01,
VisiblePins := "PV, SPProg, SPCascade, RatioProg, CVProg, FF, HandFB, ProgProgReq, ProgOperReq, ProgCasRatReq, ProgAutoReq, ProgManuaReq,
ProgOverrideReq, ProgHandReq, CVEU, SP, PVHHAlarm, PVHAlarm, PVLAlarm, PVLLAlarm, PVROCPosAlarm, PVROCNegAlarm, DevHHAlarm,
DevHAlarm, DevLAlarm, DevLLAlarm, ProgOper, CasRat, Auto, Manual, Override, Hand")
PMUL
Operand := PMUL_01,
VisiblePins := "In, Multipler, Out")
POSP
Operand := POSP_01,
VisiblePins := "SP, Position, OpenedFB, ClosedFB, OpenOut, CloseOut")
RAD
Operand := RAD_01,
RESD
Operand := RESD_01,
VisiblePins := "Set, Reset, Out, OutNot")
RLIM
Operand := RLIM_01,
VisiblePins := "In, ByPass, Out")
RMPS
Operand := RMPS_01,
VisiblePins := "PV, CurrentSegProg, OutProg, SoakTimeProg, ProgProgReq, ProgOperReq, ProgAutoReq, ProgManualReq, ProgHoldReq, Out,
CurrentSeg, SoakTimeLeft, GuarRampOn, GuarSoakOn, ProgOper, Auto, Manual, Hold",
RampValue := array_name,
SoakValue := array_name,
SoakTime := array_name)
RTOR
Operand := RTOR_01,
VisiblePins := TimerEnable, PRE, Reset, ACC, DN")
SCL
Operand := SCL_01,
SCRV
Operand := SCRV_01,
SEL
Operand := SEL_01,
VisiblePins := "In1, In2, SelectorIn, Out")
SETD
Operand := SETD_01,
VisiblePins := "Set, Reset, Out, OutNot")
SIN
Operand := SIN_01,
VisiblePins := SIN(source,destination);
SNEG
Operand := SNEG_01,
VisiblePins := "In, NegateEnable, Out")
SOC
Operand := SOC_01,
SQR
Operand := SQR_01,
SRTP
Operand := SRTP_01,
VisiblePins := "In, HeatOut, CoolOut, HeatTimePercent, CoolTimePercent")
185
Chapter 9
Instruction
SSUM
Operand := SSUM_01,
VisiblePins := "In1, Select1, In2, Select2, In3, Select3, In4, Select4, Out")
SUB
Operand := SUB_01,
TAN
Operand := TAN_01,
TOD
Operand := TOD_01,
TOFR
Operand := TOFR_01,
VisiblePins := "TimerEnable, PRE, Reset, ACC, DN")
TONR
Operand := TONR_01,
VisiblePins := "TimerEnable, PRE, Reset, ACC, DN")
TOT
Operand := TOT_01,
VisiblePins := "In, ProgProgReq, ProgOperReq, ProgStartReq, ProgStopReq, ProgResetReq, Total, OldTotal, ProgOper, RunStop, ProgResetDone,
TargetFlag, TargetDev1Flag, TargetDev2Flag")
TRN
Operand := TRN_01,
UPDN
Operand := UPDN_01,
VisiblePins := "InPlus, InMinus, Out")
XOR
Operand := XOR_01,
XPY
Operand := XPY_01,
186
Chapter 10
Define a sequential function chart routine
Introduction
This chapter explains how to enter sequential function chart logic in a complete
import/export file.
For more information on creating sequential function charts and correct syntax,
see the Logix5000 Controller Common Procedures Programming Manual,
publication 1756-PM001.
Sequential function chart

routine
These examples show sequential function chart structure.
L5X sequential function chart structure

<Routines>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<SFCContent [SFCContent_Attributes]>
<Step [Step_Attributes]/>
<Transition [Transition_Attributes]/>
<Branch [Branch_Attributes]/>
<SbrRet [SbrRet_Attributes]/>
<Stop [Stop_Attributes]/>
<DirectedLink [DirectedLink_Attributes]/>
text
</TextBox>
</SFCContent>
</Routine>
</Routines>
L5K sequential function chart SFC_ROUTINE structure

SFC_ROUTINE <routine_name> [(Routine_Attributes,
SFC_Attributes)]
<STEP declaration>
<TRANSITION declaration>
187
Chapter 10
<BRANCH declaration>
<SBR_RET declaration>
<STOP declaration>
<DIRECTED_LINK declaration>
<TEXT_BOX declaration)
END_SFC_ROUTINE
Sequential function chart elements

L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
N/A
routine_name

Description
Description
SFCContent
N/A
Sequential function chart logic.
SFC_Routine attributes
Attribute
Description
Name

For L5K, the name is an element of the statement.
Type
L5X only. Specify SFC.

SheetSize
The size of the SFC. Select one of these options.

Letter (8.5x11in)
Legal (8.5x14in)
Tabloid (11x17in)
A4 (210x297mm)
A3 (297x420mm)
In L5X, this attribute is on the <SFCContent> element.
SheetOrientation
The orientation of the SFC sheet. Select Portrait or Landscape.

188
Attribute
Chapter 10
Description
StepName
The prefix for the name of the step blocks within this SFC routine. The
Logix Designer application uses this prefix when it automatically
generates an SFC_STEP tag.
TransitionName
The prefix for the name of the transition blocks with this SFC routine. The Logix Designer application uses this
prefix when it automatically generates a transition tag.
ActionName
The prefix for the name of the action blocks in this SFC routine. The Logix Designer application uses this prefix
when it automatically generates an SFC_ACTION tag.

StopName
The prefix for the name of the stop blocks in this SFC routine. The Logix Designer application uses this prefix
when it automatically generates an SFC_STOP tag.
OnlineEditType
L5X only. Specify the online edit logic type (Original, PendingEdits, or TestEdits). This attribute is not
specified if there are no edits.
PermissionSet
Export sequential function

chart logic while editing
online
If you export sequential function chart logic that contains online edits, the export
file exports LOGIC blocks (in L5K format) or additional <SFCContent>
elements (in L5X format) to indicate the original, test edits, and pending edits
states. If there are no online edits, you will not see these LOGIC blocks or
additional <SFCContent> elements.
L5X Example: Test edits and pending edits exist
189
Chapter 10
L5K Example 1: Both test edits and pending edits exist

SFC_ROUTINE MySFCRoutine (SheetSize := "Letter (8.5x11in)",
SheetOrientation := Landscape, StepName := "Step",
TransitionName := "Tran", ActionName := "Action",
StopName := "Stop")
(* SFC logic here *)
END_LOGIC
END_LOGIC
END_LOGIC
END_SFC_ROUTINE
L5K Example 2: Only pending edits exist

SFC_ROUTINE MySFCRoutine (SheetSize := "Letter (8.5x11in)",
SheetOrientation := Landscape, StepName := "Step",
StopName := "Stop")
END_LOGIC
END_LOGIC
END_SFC_ROUTINE
Online edit types

Item
Identifies
Online_Edit_Type
When you export logic:

If online edits exist, there is a LOGIC block for Online_Edit_Type := Orig and the appropriate LOGIC block for the existing edits.
Online_Edit_Type : = Pend indicates pending edits. Online_Edit_Type := Test indicates test edits.
If there are no online edits when you export the logic, there are no LOGIC blocks and the main components in the routine are SFC logic
components.
Steps
190
These examples show the step structure.
Chapter 10
L5X step structure

<Step [Step_Attributes]>
<Preset>
logic
</Preset>
<LimitHigh>
logic
</LimitHigh>
<LimitLow>
logic
</LimitLow>
<Action>
logic
</Action>
</Step>
L5K STEP structure

STEP (Step_Attributes)
<PRESET declaration>
<LIMIT_HIGH declaration>
<LIMIT_LOW declaration>
<ACTION_LIST declaration>
END_STEP
Step elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
Preset
PRESET
A structured text expression that specifies the preset time in milliseconds for the step timer.
If the PresetUsesExpression attribute (above) is Yes, type preset logic.
LimitHigh
LIMIT_HIGH
A structured text expression that specifies the preset time in milliseconds for a limit
high alarm. If the LimitHighUsesExpression attribute (above) is Yes, type limit high logic.
LimitLow
LIMIT_LOW
A structured text expression that specifies the preset time in milliseconds for a limit
low alarm. If the LimitLowUsesExpression attribute (above) is Yes, type limit low logic.
ActionList
ACTION_LIST
The actions in the step.
Step attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The step identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this step from all other blocks. Type an
191
Chapter 10
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
X-coordinate on internal grid. Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
Y-coordinate on internal grid. Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
Operand
Operand
The step tag. Type a tag of datatype SFC_STEP. The import process uses this tag name to
name the step.
HideDesc
HideDescription
Whether or not to hide the step description. Type Yes or No.
DescX
DescriptionX
X-coordinate on internal grid of the description box. Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
DescY
DescriptionY
Y-coordinate on internal grid of the description box. Type unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
DescWidth
DescriptionWidth
InitialStep
InitialStep
Whether this step is the initial step of the routine. Type Yes or No.
If you have multiple steps identified as the initial step, which is incorrect syntax, the import
process designates the last initial step it encounters as the initial step and removes the
initial step indicators from any other steps.
PresetUsesExpr
PresetUsesExpression
Whether the preset for the step timer is a structured text expression. Type Yes if you plan to
enter an expression in a preset element, otherwise, type No.
LimitHighUsesExpr
LimitHighUsesExpression
Whether the preset for the limit high alarm is a structured text expression. Type Yes if you
plan to enter an expression in a limit high element, otherwise, type No.
LimitLowUsesExpr
LimitLowUsesExpression
Whether the preset for the limit low alarm is a structured text expression. Type Yes if you
plan to enter an expression in a limit low element, otherwise, type No.
ShowActions
ShowActions
Whether to show or hide the steps actions. Type Yes or No.
Preset
The preset component contains a structured text expression that specifies the
preset time in milliseconds for the step timer.
L5X preset structure

<Preset>
<STContent>
<Line Number="number">
<![CDATA[ structured_text; ]]>
</Line>
</STContent>
</Preset>
L5K PRESET structure

PRESET (LanguageType := ST)
<structured_text>
END_PRESET
192
Chapter 10
Each line of L5K structured text begins with a single quote ().
Limit high
The limit high component contains a structured text expression that specifies the
preset time in milliseconds for a limit high alarm.
L5X limit high structure

<LimitHigh>
<STContent>
<Line Number="0">
</Line>
</STContent>
</LimitHigh>
L5K LIMITHIGH structure

LIMITLOW (LanguageType := ST)
<structured_text>
END_LIMITLOW
Limit low
The limit low component contains a structured text expression that specifies the
preset time in milliseconds for a limit low alarm.
L5X limit low structure

<LimitLow>
<STContent>
<Line Number="0">
</Line>
</STContent>
</LimitLow>
L5K LIMITHIGH structure

LIMITLOW (LanguageType := ST)
<structured_text>
END_LIMITLOW
193
Chapter 10
Each step can contain multiple actions.
Action list
L5X Action Structure

<Action [Action_Attributes]>
<Preset>
logic
</Preset>
<Body>
logic
</Body>
</Action>
L5K ACTION structure

ACTION (Action_Attributes)
<PRESET declaration>
<BODY declaration>
END_ACTION
Action attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The action identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this action from all other blocks. Enter an
Operand
Operand
The action tag. Enter a tag of datatype SFC_ACTION. The import process uses this tag name
to name the action.
Qualifier
Qualifier
The action qualifier.

Qualifier
N
R
S
L
D
P
P1
P0
SL
SD
DS
Description
non-stored
reset
stored
time limited
time delayed
pulse
pulse (rising edge)
pulse (falling edge)
stored and time limited
stored and time delayed
time delayed and stored
IsBoolean
IsBoolean
Whether or not the action is boolean. Enter Yes or No.
PresetUsesExpr
PresetUsesExpression
Whether the preset for the action timer is a structured text expression. Enter Yes if you plan
to enter an expression in a PRESET block, otherwise, enter No.
194
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
IndicatorTag
IndicatorTag
The indicator tag. Enter tag.
Chapter 10
These examples show transition structure.
Transitions
L5X transition structure

<Transition [Transition_Attributes]>
<Condition>
logic
</Condition>
</Transition>
L5K TRANSITION structure

TRANSITION (Transition_Attributes)
<CONDITION declaration>
END_TRANSITION
Transition elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
Condition
CONDITION
The condition to evaluate for the transition.
Transition attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
Operand
Operand
name the step.
HideDesc
HideDescription
DescX
DescriptionX
DescY
DescriptionY
195
Chapter 10
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
DescWidth
DescriptionWidth
Force
Force
The transition is forced. Type true for forced true (set) or type false for forced false
(cleared). If the transition is not forced, do not enter this attribute.
Condition
The condition component uses a structured text expression to specify a condition

to evaluate for the transition.
L5X condition structure

<Condition>
<STContent>
<Line Number="0">
</Line>
</STContent>
</Condition>
L5K CONDITION structure

CONDITION (LanguageType := ST)
<structured_text>
END_CONDITION
Subroutine calls
Subroutine calls pass values into and out of the SFC routine.
L5X SbrRet structure

<SbrRet [Subroutine_Attributes]/>
L5K SBR_RET structure

SBR_RET (Subroutine_Attributes)
END_SBR_RET
196
Chapter 10
Subroutine attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The SBR_RET identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this subroutine call from all other blocks.
In
In
List of values to receive from the calling routine. Type list of tags or literal values and
separate each entry by a comma (,). Enter empty quotes if there are no values to receive.
Ret
Out
List of values to pass to the calling routine. Type list of tags or literal values and separate
each entry by a comma (,). Enter empty quotes if there are no values to pass.
Stops
These examples show stop structure.
L5X stop structure

<Stop [StopAttributes]/>
L5K STOP structure

STOP (Stop_Attributes)
END_STOP
Stop attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The stop identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this stop from all other blocks. Type an
Operand
Operand
The stop tag. Type a tag of datatype SFC_STOP. The import process uses this tag name to
name the stop.
HideDesc
HideDescription
Whether or not to hide the stop description. Type Yes or No.
DescX
DescriptionX
DescY
DescriptionY
DescWidth
DescriptionWidth
197
Chapter 10
The branch blocks in an SFC routine identify simultaneous or selection branches

in the routine.
Branches

</Branch>

END_LEG
END_BRANCH
Branch attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The branch identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this branch from all other blocks. Type an
BranchType
BranchType
The type of branch. Type Simultaneous or Selection.
BranchFlow
BranchFlow
The direction of the branch. Type Converge or Diverge.
Priority
Priority
Whether the priority of a divergent selection branch is defined by the user. This attribute
applies only to divergent selection branches. Type Default or UserDefined.
Leg attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The leg identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this leg from all other blocks. Type an unsigned,
32-bit integer value.
Force
Force
Whether the leg is forced or not. You can force only a leg in a simultaneous branch. Omit this
attribute, for no forces, or type false to force the leg false.
198
Chapter 10
The directed link blocks in an SFC routine identify the links between SFC
components.
Directed links
L5X DirectedLink structure

<DirectedLink
[DirectedLinkAttributes]/>
L5K DIRECTED_LINK structure

DIRECTED_LINK (Directed_Link_Attributes)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
Directed link attributes

L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
FromID
FromElementID
The ID of the object. Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
ToID
ToElementID
The ID of the object that the FromID object is attached to. Type an unsigned, 32-bit
integer value.
Show
ShowLink
Whether or not to show the link. Type TRUE or FALSE.
Directed link guidelines

Use these guidelines for directed links:
Text boxes
All directed link blocks must come after all step, transition, stop, and branch
blocks.
A directed link links only one element to one other element.
The text box blocks in an SFC routine hold descriptions about SFC components.
L5X TextBox structure

<TextBox [TextBoxAttributes]>
<![CDATA[ text ]] >
</TextBox>
199
Chapter 10
L5K TEXTBOX structure

TEXT_BOX (Text_Box_Attributes,
Text := <"text">)
END_TEXT_BOX
Text box attributes

L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID



Width
Width
Text
Text
The descriptive text.
Text box guidelines

Use these guidelines for text boxes:
Attachments
All text box blocks must come after all directed link blocks.
Text boxes can be free-standing or they can be attached to SFC elements.
The attachment blocks in an SFC routine identify the attachments from text
boxes to other SFC elements.


END_ATTACHMENT
200
Chapter 10
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
FromID
FromElementID
ToID
ToElementID
Examples
Use an attachment to link a text box to an SFC element.
L5X sequential function chart example
201
Chapter 10
L5K SFC_ROUTINE Example
202
Chapter 10
SFC_ROUTINE Sample_SFC_Routine1 (SheetSize := "Letter

(8.5x11in)",
SheetOrientation := Landscape, StepName :=
"Step",
StopName := "Stop")
TRANSITION (ID := 0, X := 120, Y := 1000, Operand :=
C_Array_Tran[31],
HideDescription := Yes, DescriptionX := 155,
DescriptionY := 985,
DescriptionWidth := 0)
'TempTag > 0
END_CONDITION
END_TRANSITION
BRANCH (ID := 2, Y := 820, BranchType := Simultaneous,
BranchFlow := Diverge)
LEG (ID := 3)
END_LEG
LEG (ID := 4)
END_LEG
LEG (ID := 5)
END_LEG
END_BRANCH
Aliased_Tran,
HideDescription := No, DescriptionX := 520,
'TempTag > 0
END_CONDITION
END_TRANSITION
STOP (ID := 8, X := 460, Y := 880, Operand :=
ConsumedTag_Stop,
END_STOP
Tran_UsedTwice,
'TempTag > 0
END_CONDITION
END_TRANSITION
Tran_UsedTwice,
203
Chapter 10

'TempTag > 0
END_CONDITION
END_TRANSITION
BRANCH (ID := 14, Y := 940, BranchType := Selection,
BranchFlow := Diverge,
Priority := UserDefined)
LEG (ID := 15)
END_LEG
LEG (ID := 16)
END_LEG
END_BRANCH
BRANCH (ID := 17, Y := 1320, BranchType :=
Simultaneous, BranchFlow := Converge)
LEG (ID := 18)
END_LEG
LEG (ID := 19)
END_LEG
END_BRANCH
STOP (ID := 20, X := 520, Y := 1440, Operand :=
Aliased_Stop, HideDescription := No,
DescriptionX := 400, DescriptionY := 1480,
END_STOP
STEP (ID := 22, X := 420, Y := 360, Operand :=
First_Step, HideDescription := Yes,
DescriptionWidth := 0,
InitialStep := Yes, PresetUsesExpression := No,
LimitHighUsesExpression := No,
LimitLowUsesExpression := No, ShowActions := Yes)
ACTION (ID := 24, Operand := First_Action,
Qualifier := L, IsBoolean := No,
PresetUsesExpression := No, IndicatorTag :=
Watch_Tag[3].PRE)
BODY (LanguageType := ST)
'
END_BODY
END_ACTION
ACTION (ID := 25, Operand := C_Array_Action[3],
Qualifier := SL,
IsBoolean := No, PresetUsesExpression := No,
IndicatorTag := C_Produced_IndicatorArray[1])
'
END_BODY
END_ACTION
204
Chapter 10
ACTION (ID := 26, Operand :=

UDT_Elem.Action_Member, Qualifier := D,
IndicatorTag := "")
'
END_BODY
END_ACTION
ACTION (ID := 27, Operand := Action_000,
Qualifier := R, IsBoolean := No,
PresetUsesExpression := No, IndicatorTag := "")
'
END_BODY
END_ACTION
Qualifier := N, IsBoolean := No,
PresetUsesExpression := No, IndicatorTag :=
Aliased_Indicator)
'
END_BODY
END_ACTION
Qualifier := DS, IsBoolean := Yes,
PresetUsesExpression := No, IndicatorTag := "")
END_ACTION
ACTION (ID := 30, Operand := ConsumedTag_Action,
Qualifier := P0,
IndicatorTag := ConsumedTag_Indicator)
'
END_BODY
END_ACTION
END_STEP
"C_Array_Step[0,1,2]",
DescriptionWidth := 0, InitialStep := No,
PresetUsesExpression := No,
END_STEP
NoTag_Tran,
205
Chapter 10

'TempTag > 0
END_CONDITION
END_TRANSITION
UDT_Elem.Step_Member,
END_STEP
Step_001, HideDescription := No,
InitialStep := No, PresetUsesExpression := No,
END_STEP
BRANCH (ID := 39, Y := 1220, BranchType := Selection,
BranchFlow := Converge)
LEG (ID := 40)
END_LEG
LEG (ID := 41)
END_LEG
END_BRANCH
Step_000, HideDescription := No,
InitialStep := No, PresetUsesExpression := No,
END_STEP
ConsumedTag_Step,
END_STEP
UDT_Elem.Tran_Member,
206
'TempTag > 0
END_CONDITION
END_TRANSITION
DIRECTED_LINK (FromElementID
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
Chapter 10
:= 46, ToElementID := 41,
:= 35, TToElementID := 46,
DIRECTED_LINK (FromElementID := 39, ToElementID := 42,

ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
207
Chapter 10

ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
ShowLink := True)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
TEXT_BOX (ID := 48, X := 260, Y := 1380, Width := 0,
Text := "Simultaneous Branch Converge Text Box")
END_TEXT_BOX
ATTACHMENT (FromElementID := 48, ToElementID := 17)
END_ATTACHMENT
END_SFC_ROUTINE
208
Chapter 11
Define a structured text routine
Introduction
This chapter explains how to enter structured text logic in a complete

import/export file.
Structured text routine
These examples show the structured text routine structure.
L5X structured text structure

<Routines>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<STContent [StContent_Attributes]>
<Line Number="number">
<![CDATA[ structured_text ]]>
</Line>
</STContent>
</Routine>
</Routines>
L5K structured text ST_ROUTINE structure

ST_ROUTINE <routine_name> [(Description := "text")]
(*comment_text*)
<statements>;
END_ST_ROUTINE;
Structured TextRoutine Elements

L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
routine_name

Description
Description
STContent
statements
Structured text logic.
N/At
comment_text
Comment text within the structured text logic.
209
Chapter 11
ST_Routine attributes
Attribute
Description
Name

Type
L5X only. Specify ST.

L5X only. Specify the online edit logic type. The options include Original, PendingEdits, or TestEdits. This
attribute is not specified if there are no edits.
OnlineEditType
In L5X, this attribute is on the <STContent> element.

PermissionSet
Structured text logic
Enter the structured text logic within a routine component in an import/export

file. Each line of structured text must begin with a single quote ().
Structured text is not case sensitive. Structured text can contain these elements.
Term
Definition
Examples
Assignment
Use an assignment statement to assign values to tags.

The operator is the assignment operator.
Terminate the assignment with a semi colon ";".
tag := expression;
Expression
An expression is part of a complete assignment or construct statement. An expression evaluates

to a number (numerical expression) or to a true or false state (BOOL expression).
An expression contains these elements.
Tags
A named area of the memory where data is stored (BOOL, SINT, INT,
DINT, REAL, string).
value1
Immediates
A constant value.
Operators
A symbol or mnemonic that specifies an operation within an

expression.
tag1 + tag2
tag1 >= value1
Functions
When executed, a function yields one value. Use parentheses to

contain the operand of a function.
function(tag1)
Functions can be used only in expressions.
210
Term
Definition
Examples
Instruction
An instruction is a standalone statement.

An instruction uses parenthesis to contain its operands.
Depending on the instruction, there can be zero, one, or multiple operands.
When executed, an instruction yields one or more values that are part of a data structure.
Terminate the instruction with a semi colon ";".
instruction();
Chapter 11
instruction(operand);
instruction(operand1,
operand2,operand3);
Instructions cannot be used in expressions.

Construct
A conditional statement used to trigger structured text code.

Terminate the construct with a semi colon ";".
IF...THEN
CASE
FOR...DO
WHILE...DO
REPEAT...UNTIL
EXIT
Comment
Text that explains or clarifies what a section of structured text does.

Use comments to make it easier to interpret the structured text.
//comment
Comments do not affect the execution of the structured text.
(*start of comment . . . end

of comment*)
Comments can appear anywhere in structured text.
/*start of comment . . . end

of comment*/
Export structured text logic

while editing online
If you export structured text logic that contains online edits, the export file
exports LOGIC blocks (in L5K format) or additional <STContent> elements (in
L5X format) to indicate the original test edits and pending edits states. If there are
no online edits, you will not see these LOGIC blocks or additional <STContent>
elements.
Item
Identifies
Online_Edit_Type
When you export the logic:

If online edits exist, there is a LOGIC block for Online_Edit_Type := Orig and the appropriate LOGIC block for the existing edits.
Online_Edit_Type : = Pend indicates pending edits. Online_Edit_Type := Test indicates test edits.
If there are no online edits when you export the logic, there are no LOGIC blocks and the main components in the routine are structured text
statements.
211
Chapter 11
Examples
L5X example: test edits and pending edits exist
L5K Example 1: Test edits and pending edits exist

ST_ROUTINE MySTRoutine
(* structured text logic here *)
END_LOGIC
END_LOGIC
(* structured text logix here *)
END_LOGIC
END_ST_ROUTINE
L5K Example 2: Only pending edits exist
ST_ROUTINE MySTRoutine
END_LOGIC
END_LOGIC
END_ST_ROUTINE
212
Chapter 11
L5X structured text routine example
L5K structured text ST_ROUTINE example
This is an example of an exported structured text routine.

ST_ROUTINE <routine_name>
(*----------- Sample of ST code-----------------------------*)
IF (myInteger = 12) THEN
myInteger := ((5 * myInputInteger1) + (7 *

myInteger2)) - 71;
WHILE (myTmpVar >= 0) DO
myInteger := myInteger + 3;
myTmpVar := myTmpVar - 1;
END_WHILE;
END_IF;
ND_ST_ROUTINE
Structured text
These tables list each structured text instruction and function. For more details,
see these reference manuals.
213
Chapter 11
Instruction Type
Resource

instruction
Logix5000 Controllers Advanced Process Control and Drives Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication1756-RM006.
Motion instruction
Structured Text Instructions

Instruction
Neutral Text Format
ABL
ABL(Channel,SerialPortControl);
ABS
dest := ABS(source);
ACB
ACB(Channel,SerialPortControl);
ACL
ACL(Channel,ClearSerialPortRead,ClearSerialPortWrite);
ACOS
dest := ACOS(source);
ADD
dest := sourceA + sourceB;
AHL
AHL(Channel,ANDMask,ORMask,SerialPortControl);
ALM
ALM(ALM_tag);
ALMA
ALMA (ALMA_tag,In,ProgAckAll,ProgramDisable,ProgEnable);
ALMD
ALMD (ALMD_tag,In,ProgAck,ProgReset,ProgDisable,ProgEnable);
AND
dest := sourceA & sourceB;

dest := sourceA AND sourceB;
ARD
ARD(Channel,Destination,SerialPortControl);
ARL
ARL(Channel,Destination,SerialPortControl);
ASIN
dest := ASIN(source);
ATAN
dest := ATAN(source);
AWA
AWA(Channel,Source,SerialPortControl);
AWT
AWT(Channel,Source,SerialPortControl);
BAND
IF operandA AND operandB THEN

<statement>;
ENDIF;
BNOT
IF NOT operand THEN

<statements>;
ENDIF;
BOR
IF operandA OR operandB THEN

<statements>;
ENDIF;
BTDT
BTD(BTDT_tag);
BXOR
IF operandA XOR operandB THEN

<statements>;
ENDIF;
214
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
CASE...OF
CASE numeric_expression OF
Chapter 11
selector1: statement;
selectorN: statement;
ELSE
statement;
END_CASE;
CLR
dest := 0;
CONCAT
CONCAT(SourceA,SourceB,Dest)
COP
COP(Source,Dest,Length);
COS
dest := COS(source);
CPS
CPS(Source,Dest,Length)
CTUD
CTUD(CTUD_tag);
D2SD
D2SD(D2SD_tag);
D3SD
D3SD(D3SD_tag);
DEDT
DEDT(DEDT_tag,storage);
DEG
dest := DEG(source);
DELETE
DELETE(Source,Qty,Start,Dest);
DERV
DERV(DERV_tag);
DFF
DFF(DFF_tag);
DIV
dest := sourceA / sourceB;
DTOS
DTOS(Source,Dest);
EOT
EOT(DataBit);
EQU
IF sourceA = sourceB THEN

<statements>;
ENDIF;
ESEL
ESEL(ESEL_tag);
EVENT
EVENT(task);
FGEN
FGEN(FGEN_tag,X1,Y1,X2,Y2);
FIND
FIND(Source,Search,Start,Result)
FOR...DO
FOR count:= initial_value TO final_value BY increment DO

<statement>;
END_FOR;
GEQ
IF sourceA >= sourceB THEN

<statements>;
ENDIF;
215
Chapter 11
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
GRT
IF sourceA > sourceB THEN

<statements>;
ENDIF;
GSV
GSV(ClassName,InstanceName,AttributeName,Dest);
HLL
HLL(HLL_tag);
HPF
HPF(HPF_tag);
IF...THEN
IF bool_expression THEN
<statement>;
END_IF;
INSERT
INSERT(SourceA,SourceB,Start,Dest);
INTG
INTG(INTG_tag);
IOT
IOT(output_tag);
JKFF
JKFF(JKFF_tag);
JSR
JSR(RoutineName,InputCount,InputPar,ReturnPar);
LDL2
LDL2(LDL2_tag);
LDLG
LDLG(LDLG_tag);
LEQ
IF sourceA <= sourceB THEN

<statements>;
ENDIF;
LES
IF sourceA < sourceB THEN

<statements>;
ENDIF;
LN
dest := LN(source);
LOG
dest := LOG(source);
LOWER
LOWER(Source,Dest);
LPF
LPF(LPF_tag);
MAAT
MAAT(Axis,MotionControl);
MAFR
MAFR(Axis,MotionControl);
MAG
MAG(SlaveAxis,MasterAxis,MotionControl,Direction,Ratio,SlaveCounts,
MasterCounts,MasterReference,RatioFormat,Clutch,AccelRate,AccelUnits);
MAH
MAH(Axis,MotionControl);
MAHD
MAHD(Axis,MotionControl,DiagnosticTest,ObservedDirection);
MAJ
MAJ(Axis,MotionControl,Direction,Speed,SpeedUnits,AccelRate,AccelUnits,
DecelRate,DecelUnits,Profile,Merge,MergeSpeed);
MAM
MAM(Axis,MotionControl,MoveType,Position,Speed,SpeedUnits,AccelRate,
AccelUnits,DecelRate,DecelUnits,Profile,Merge,MergeSpeed);
MAOC
MAOC(Axis,ExecutionTarget,MotionControl,Output,Input,OutputCam,
CamStartPosition,CamEndPosition,OutputCompensation,ExecutionMode,
ExecutionSchedule,AxisArmPosition,CamArmPosition,Reference);
216
Chapter 11
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
MAPC
MAPC(SlaveAxis,MasterAxis,MotionControl,Direction,CamProfile,
SlaveScaling,MasterScaling,ExecutionMode,ExecutionSchedule,
MasterLockPosition,CamLockPosition,MasterReference,MasterDirection);
MAR
MAR(Axis,MotionControl,TriggerCondition,WindowedRegistration,
MinimumPosition,MaximumPosition);
MAS
MAS(Axis,MotionControl,StopType,ChangeDecel,DecelRate,DecelUnits);
MASD
MASD(Axis,MotionControl);
MASR
MASR(Axis,MotionControl);
MATC
MATC(Axis,MotionControl,Direction,CamProfile,DistanceScaling,
TimeScaling,ExecutionMode,ExecutionSchedule);
MAVE
MAVE(MAVE_tag,storage,weight);
MAW
MAW(Axis,MotionControl,TriggerCondition,Position);
MAXC
MAXC(MAXC_tag);
MCCD
MCCD(Coordinate_system,MotionControl,MotionType,ChangeSpeed,Speed,
SpeedUnits,ChangeAccel,AccelRate,AccelUnits,ChangeDecel,DecelRate,
DecelUnits,Scope);
MCCM
MCCM(CoordinateSystem,MotionControl,MoveType,Position,CircleType,
Via/Center/Radius,Direction,Speed,SpeedUnits,AccelRate,AccelUnits,
DecelRate,DecelUnits,Profile,TerminationType,Merge,MergeSpeed);
MCCP
MCCP(MotionControl,Cam,Length,StartSlope,EndSlope,CamProfile);
MCD
MCD(Axis,MotionControl,MotionType,ChangeSpeed,Speed,ChangeAccel,
AccelRate,ChangeDecel,DecelRate,SpeedUnits,AccelUnits,DecelUnits);
MCLM
MCLM(CoordinateSystem,MotionControl,MoveType,Position,Speed,SpeedUnits,
AccelRate,AccelUnits,DecelRate,DecelUnits,Profile,TerminationType,Merge,
MergeSpeed);
MCS
MCS(CoordinateSystem,MotionControl,StopType,ChangeDecel,DecelRate,
DecelUnits);
MCSD
MCSD(CoordinateSystem,MotionControl);
MCSR
MCSR(CoordinateSystem,MotionControl);
MCSV
MCSV(MotionControl,CamProfile,MasterValue,SlaveValue,SlopeValue,
SlopeDerivative);
MCT
MCT(SourceSystem,TargetSystem,MotionControl,Orientation,Translation);
MCTP
MCTP(SourceSystem,TargetSystem,MotionControl,Orientation,Translation,
TransformDirection,ReferencePosition,TransformPosition);
MDF
MDF(Axis,MotionControl);
MDO
MDO(Axis,MotionControl,DriveOutput,DriveUnits);
MDOC
MDOC(Axis,ExecutionTarget,MotionControl,DisarmType);
MDR
MDR(Axis,MotionControl);
MDW
MDW(Axis,MotionControl);
MEQ
IF (Source AND Mask) = (Compare AND Mask) THEN

<statements>;
END_IF;
217
Chapter 11
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
MGS
MGS(Group,MotionControl,StopMode);
MGSD
MGSD(Group,MotionControl);
MGSP
MGSP(Group,MotionControl);
MGSR
MGSR(Group,MotionControl);
MID
MID(Source,Qty,Start,Dest);
MINC
MINC(MINC_tag);
MOD
dest := sourceA MOD sourceB;
MRAT
MRAT(Axis,MotionControl);
MRHD
MRHD(Axis,MotionControl,DiagnosticTest);
MRP
MRP(Axis,MotionControl,Type,PositionSelect,Position);
MSF
MSF(Axis,MotionControl);
MSG
MSG(MessageControl);
MSO
MSO(Axis,MotionControl);
MUL
dest := sourceA * sourceB;
MVMT
MVMT(MVMT_tag);
NEG
dest := -source;
NEQ
IF sourceA <> sourceB THEN

<statements>;
END_IF;
NOT
IF NOT source THEN

<statements>;
END_IF;
OR
dest := sourceA OR sourceB
OSFI
OSFI(OSFI_tag);
OSRI
OSRI(OSRI_tag);
OTE
data_bit [:=] BOOL_expression;
OTL
IF BOOL_expression THEN
data_bit := 1;
END_IF;
OTU
IF BOOL_expression THEN
data_bit := 0;
END_IF;
PATT
PATT(PhaseName,Result);
PCLF
PCLF(PhaseName);
PCMD
PCMD(PhaseName,Command,Result);
PDET
PDET(PhaseName);
PFL
PFL(Source);
PI
PI(PI_tag);
218
Chapter 11
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
PID
PID(PID,ProcessVariable,Tieback,ControlVariable,PIDMasterLoop,InholdBit,
InholdValue);
PIDE
PIDE(PIDE_tag);
PMUL
PMUL(PMUL_tag);
POSP
POSP(POSP_tag);
POVR
POVR(PhaseName,Command,Result);
PPD
PPD();
PRNP
PRNP();
PSC
PSC();
PXRQ
PXRQ(PhaseInstruction,ExternalRequest,DataValue);
RAD
dest := RAD(source);
REPEAT...UNTIL
REPEAT
<statement>;
UNTIL bool_expression
END_REPEAT;
RESD
RESD(RESD_tag);
RET
RET(ReturnPar);
RLIM
RLIM(RLIM_tag);
RMPS
RMPS(RMPS_tag,RampValue,SoakValue,SoakTime);
RTOR
RTOR(RTOR_tag);
RTOS
RTOS(Source,Dest)
SBR
SBR(InputPar);
SCRV
SCRV(SCRV_tag);
SETD
SETD(SETD_tag);
SFP
SFP(SFCRoutineName,TargetState);
SFR
SFR(SFCRoutineName,StepName);
SIN
dest := SIN(source);
SIZE
SIZE(Souce,Dimensiontovary,Size);
SNEG
SNEG(SNEG_tag);
SOC
SOC(SOC_tag);
SQRT
dest := SQRT(source);
SRT
SRT(Array,Dimtovary,Control);
SRTP
SRTP(SRTP_tag);
SSUM
SSUM(SSUM_tag);
SSV
SSV(ClassName,InstanceName,AttributeName,Source);
219
Chapter 11
Instruction
Neutral Text Format
STOD
STOD(Source,Dest)
STOR
STOR(Source,Dest)
SUB
dest := sourceA - sourceB;
SWPB
SWPB(Source,OrderMode,Dest);
TAN
dest := TAN(source);
TOFR
TOFR(TOFR_tag);
TONR
TONR(TONR_tag);
TOT
TOT(TOT_tag);
TRUNC
dest := TRUNC(source);
UID
UID();
UIE
UIE();
UPDN
UPDN(UPDN_tag);
UPPER
UPPER(Source,Destination);
WHILE...DO
WHILE bool_expression DO
<statement>;
END_WHILE;
XIC
IF data_bit THEN
<statement>;
END_IF;
XIO
IF NOT data_bit THEN

<statement>;
END_IF;
XOR
dest := sourceA XOR sourceB;
XPY
dest := sourceX XPY sourceY;
220
Chapter 12
Define an Equipment Sequence routine
Introduction
This chapter explains how to define an Equipment Sequence routine in a

complete import/export file.
Equipment Sequence
Routine
The following examples show Equipment Sequence structure.
L5X Equipment Sequence structure

<Routines>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<SEQContent [SEQContent_Attributes]>
<Step [Step_Attributes]/>
<Transition [Transition_Attributes]/>
<Stop [Stop_Attributes]/>
<DirectedLink
[DirectedLink_Attributes]/>
text
</TextBox>
<TagConfigurations>
[TagConfiguration]
221
Chapter 12
</TagConfigurations/>
</SEQContent>
</Routine>
</Routines>
L5K Equipment Sequence ESQ_ROUTINE structure

ESQ_ROUTINE <routine_name> [(Routine_Attributes,
SFC_Attributes)]
<STEP declaration>
<TRANSITION declaration>
<STOP declaration>
<DIRECTED_LINK declaration>
<TEXT_BOX declaration)
<TAG_CONFIGURATION declaration>
END_ESQ_ROUTINE
Equipment Sequence elements

L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
N/A
routine_name
Description
Description
SEQContent
N/A
Equipment sequence logic.
222
Chapter 12
ESQ_Routine attributes
Attribute
Description
Name

For L5K, the name is an element of the statement.
Type
L5X only. Specify "Sequence".

SheetSize
The size of the Equipment Sequence. Select one of these options.

Letter (8.5x11in)
Legal (8.5x14in)
Tabloid (11x17in)
A4 (210x297mm)
A3 (297x420mm)
In L5X, this attribute is on the <SEQContent> element.
The orientation of the Equipment Sequence sheet. Select Portrait or Landscape.
SheetOrientation
In L5X, this attribute is on the <SEQContent> element.

PermissionSet
These examples show the step structure.
Steps
L5X step structure

<Step [Step_Attributes] />
L5K STEP structure

STEP (Step_Attributes)
END_STEP
Step attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The step identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this step from all
other blocks. Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
223
Chapter 12
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
X-coordinate on internal grid. Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer

value.
Y-coordinate on internal grid. Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer

value.
Operand
Operand
The step tag. Type a tag of datatype ESQ_STEP. The import

process uses this tag name to name the step.
HideDesc
HideDescription
DescX
DescriptionX
X-coordinate on internal grid of the description box. Type an

DescY
DescriptionY
Y-coordinate on internal grid of the description box. Type

DescWidth
DescriptionWidth
This attribute is not currently used; it is there for future use. Type
0.
InitialStep
InitialStep
Whether this step is the initial step of the routine. Type Yes or No.
If you have multiple steps identified as the initial step, which is
incorrect syntax, the import process designates the last initial step
it encounters as the initial step and removes the initial step
indicators from any other steps.
NoPhaseStep
NoPhaseStep
Whether this step is a place holder step, a step which is configured

not to start any equipment phase. PhaseName attributes are
ignored if NoPhaseStep is set to Yes in L5K, true in L5X.
L5K: Yes/No, L5X: true/false.
PhaseName
PhaseName
The name of the Phase associated with the step. Can be an empty
string.
TransferOfControlSource
TransferOfControlSource
Specifies whether this step will transfer control of its equipment

phase to an immediately following step without stopping and
resetting the phase.
TransferOfControlTarget
TransferOfControlTarget
Specifies whether this step will accept the transfer control of its
equipment phase from an immediately preceding step without
starting the phase. The phase logic is expected to be executing a
state routine. The executing routine is notified of the transfer of
control and can request new input parameters, if programmed to
do so, from the target step.
Transitions
These examples show transition structure.
L5X transition structure

<Transition [Transition_Attributes]>
<Condition>
224
Chapter 12
logic
</Condition>
</Transition>
L5K TRANSITION structure

TRANSITION (Transition_Attributes)
<CONDITION declaration>
END_TRANSITION
Transition elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
Condition
CONDITION
The condition to evaluate for the transition.
Transition attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
Operand
Operand
name the step.
HideDesc
HideDescription
DescX
DescriptionX
DescY
DescriptionY
DescWidth
DescriptionWidth
Force
Force
The transition is forced. Type true for forced true (set) or type false for forced false
(cleared). If the transition is not forced, do not enter this attribute.
Stops
These examples show stop structure.
L5X stop structure

<Stop [StopAttributes]/>
225
Chapter 12
L5K STOP structure

STOP (Stop_Attributes)
END_STOP
Stop attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The stop identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this stop from all other blocks. Type an
Operand
Operand
The stop tag. Type a tag of datatype SFC_STOP. The import process uses this tag name to
name the stop.
HideDesc
HideDescription
Whether or not to hide the stop description. Type Yes or No.
DescX
DescriptionX
DescY
DescriptionY
DescWidth
DescriptionWidth
Branches
The branch blocks in an Equipment Sequence routine identify simultaneous or

selection branches in the routine.

</Branch>

END_LEG
END_BRANCH
226
Chapter 12
Branch attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The branch identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this branch from all other blocks. Type an
BranchType
BranchType
The type of branch. Type Simultaneous or Selection.
BranchFlow
BranchFlow
The direction of the branch. Type Converge or Diverge.
Priority
Priority
Whether the priority of a divergent selection branch is defined by the user. This attribute
applies only to divergent selection branches. Type Default or UserDefined.
Leg attributes
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ID
ID
The leg identifier. This ID uniquely identifies this leg from all other blocks. Type an unsigned,
32-bit integer value.
Force
Force
Whether the leg is forced or not. You can force only a leg in a simultaneous branch. Omit this
attribute, for no forces, or type false to force the leg false.
The directed link blocks in an Equipment Sequence routine identify the links
between Equipment Sequence components.
Directed links
L5X DirectedLink structure

<DirectedLink
[DirectedLinkAttributes]/>
L5K DIRECTED_LINK structure

DIRECTED_LINK (Directed_Link_Attributes)
END_DIRECTED_LINK
Directed link attributes

L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
FromID
FromElementID
The ID of the object. Type an unsigned, 32-bit integer value.
227
Chapter 12
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
ToID
ToElementID
The ID of the object that the FromID object is attached to. Type an unsigned, 32-bit
integer value.
Show
ShowLink
Whether or not to show the link. Type TRUE or FALSE.
Directed link guidelines

Use these guidelines for directed links:
Attachments
All directed link blocks must come after all step, transition, stop, and branch
blocks.
A directed link links only one element to one other element.
The attachment blocks in an Equipment Sequence routine identify the

attachments from text boxes to other Equipment Sequence elements.


END_ATTACHMENT
L5X Item
L5K Item
Identifies
FromID
FromElementID
ToID
ToElementID
228
Use an attachment to link a text box to an Equipment Sequence element.
Tag configuration
Chapter 12
The following examples show the tag configuration structure.
L5X tag configuration structure

<TagConfigurations>
<TagConfiguration [Tag_Configuration_Attributes]>
<Expression>
logic
</Expression>
</TagConfiguration>
</TagConfigurations>
L5K TAG_CONFIGURATION structure

TAG_CONFIGURATION (Step_Attributes)
<EXPRESSION declaration>
END_TAG_CONFIGURATION
Tag configuration elements
Expression component
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
Expression
EXPRESSION
The expression to evaluate for the tag.
The expression component uses a structured text expression to specify an

expression to evaluate for the sequence tag.
L5X expression structure

<Expression>
<STContent>
<Line Number="0">
229
Chapter 12

</Line>
</STContent>
</Expression>
L5K EXPRESSION structure

EXPRESSION (LanguageType := ST)
<structured_text>
END_EXPRESSION
Tip:
230
Chapter 13
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the task component.
Task component
A task component defines a task in the controller project. The maximum number
of tasks depends on the type of controller.
Controller
Maximum Number of Tasks
ControlLogix
32
SoftLogix5800
32
FlexLogix
CompactLogix
1768-L30x
1769-L36x
32
32
23
DriveLogix
1769-L33x
L5K TASK structure

TASK <task_name> [(Description := "text", Attributes)]
<program_name>;
END_TASK
L5X task structure

<Tasks>
<Task [Task_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<EventInfo [EventInfo_Attributes]>
<ScheduledPrograms>
<
ScheduledProgram Name="program_name" />
</Programs>
</Task>
</Tasks>
231
Chapter 13
Task elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
task_name
The name of the task.

In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Task> element.
Description
Description
User information about the task.
EventInfo
N/A
Event information for an event task
ScheduledProgram
program_name
Each program within the task.
Task attributes
Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the task.

Type
Specify whether the type of task is Continuous, Periodic, or Event. There can be only one continuous task.
Class
Specify the class of the task. This attribute applies only to safety controller projects. Type Standard or Safety.
Rate
If the task is a periodic task, specify how often to run the task (1.000...2,000,000.000 s).
Priority
Specify the priority of a periodic task (1...15)
Watchdog
Type the watchdog timeout for the task (1.000...2,000,000.000 s).
EventTrigger
Only used for event tasks.

Specify the trigger for the event task. Type Axis Home, Axis Watch, Axis Registration 1, Axis Registration 2,
Motion Group Execution, EVENT Instruction Only, Module Input Data State Change, Consumed Tag, or
Windows Event.
In L5X, this attribute is on the <EventInfo> element.
EventTag
Only used for event tasks with a Consumed Tag trigger or a Module Input Data State Change trigger.
Specify the tag to consume.
EnableTimeout
Type Yes to enable timeouts for the task. Otherwise type No.
DisableUpdateOutputs
Type Yes to disable updates to outputs while the task executes. Otherwise type No. The default for a periodic or
continuous task is No. The default for an event task is yes.
InihibitTask
Type Yes to inhibit the task. Otherwise enter No.
232
Task guidelines
Examples
Chapter 13
Observe these guidelines when defining a task:
Tasks must be defined after programs and before controller objects.
There is a maximum of 32 tasks.
There is one continuous task only.
A program can be scheduled under one task only.
Scheduled programs must be defined (must exist).
L5X Task example
L5K TASK example

TASK joe (Type := Periodic,
sue;
betty;
END_TASK
Priority := 8, Rate := 10000)
You can define the task attributes (Type, Priority, Rate, and Watchdog) in any
order. The list of programs scheduled for a task are listed in the task declarations
block, as shown above. The programs are executed in the order they are specified.
L5K Safety TASK Example
TASK SafetyTask (Type := PERIODIC,
Class := Safety,
Rate := 10,
Priority := 10,
Watchdog := 10,
DisableUpdateOutputs := No,
InhibitTask := No)
SafetyProgram;
END_TASK
233
Chapter 14
Define a parameter connection component
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the parameter connection

component.
Parameter connection
component
A parameter connection component defines a connection between two program

parameters, which allows you to share data between programs without using
controller-scope tags.
L5K PARAMETER_CONNECTION structure

PARAMETER_CONNECTION (EndPoint1:=<program.parameter_name>,
EndPoint2:=<program.parameter_name>)
L5X ParameterConnection structure

<ParameterConnection
EndPoint1="program_name.parameter_name",
EndPoint2="program_name.parameter_name" />
</ParameterConnections>
Parameter connection attributes

Attribute
Description
EndPoint1
Specify the first end point of the parameter connection.
EndPoint2
Specify the second end point of the parameter connection.
235
Chapter 14
Parameter connection
guidelines
Observe this guideline when defining a parameter connection:
Examples
L5X ParameterConnection example
Parameter connections must be defined after tasks.
L5K PARAMETER_CONNECTION examples

PROGRAM MainProgram (MAIN := "MainRoutine",
MODE := 0,
DisableFlag := 0,
UseAsFolder := 0)
TAG
Input_ParameterMain : DINT (RADIX := Binary,
Usage := Input) := 0;
Output_ParameterMain : DINT (RADIX := Decimal,
Usage := Output,
ExternalAccess := Read Only) := 0;
236
Chapter 14
Program_tag1 : DINT (RADIX := Decimal,

Constant := Yes,
END_TAG
ROUTINE MainRoutine
END_ROUTINE
CHILD_PROGRAMS
END_CHILD_PROGRAMS
END_PROGRAM
PROGRAM SecondProgram (MODE := 0,
DisableFlag := 0,
UseAsFolder := 0)
TAG
Input_ParameterFromMain : DINT (RADIX := Decimal,
Input_ParameterFromSub : DINT (RADIX := Decimal,
END_TAG
CHILD_PROGRAMS
END_CHILD_PROGRAMS
END_PROGRAM
PROGRAM SubProgram (MODE := 0,
DisableFlag := 0,
UseAsFolder := 0)
TAG
Output_ParameterSub : DINT (RADIX := Decimal,
Usage := Output,
END_TAG
CHILD_PROGRAMS
END_CHILD_PROGRAMS
END_PROGRAM
Rate := 10,
Priority := 10,
Watchdog := 500,
DisableUpdateOutputs := No,
InhibitTask := No)
MainProgram;
SubProgram;
SecondProgram;
END_TASK
PARAMETER_CONNECTION (EndPoint1 :=
\MainProgram.Output_ParameterMain,
EndPoint2 :=
\SecondProgram.Input_ParameterFromSub)
\SubProgram.Output_ParameterSub,
237
Chapter 14
EndPoint2 :=
\MainProgram.Input_ParameterMain)
\SubProgram.Output_ParameterSub,
EndPoint2 :=
\SecondProgram.Input_ParameterFromMain)
238
Chapter 15
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the trend component.
Trend component
A trend component defines a controller trend. Trend objects are optional. You
can have as many as 32 trends per import/export file.
L5X trend structure

<Trends>
<Trend [Trend_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
<Template>
template_data
</Template>
<Pens>
pen
</Pens>
</Trend>
</Trends>
L5K TREND structure

TREND <trend_name> [(Description := "text", Trend_Attributes)]
Template := [template_data];
[PEN declaration]
END_TREND
Trend elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
trend_name
The name of the trend.
Description
Description
User information about the trend.
Template
template_data
The trend template in a byte value list.
In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Trend> element.
239
Chapter 15
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
Pens
PEN
Individual pens within the trend.

Each trend can support as many as 8 pens.
Trend attributes
Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the trend.

SamplePeriod
Specify how often trending tags are collected in msec (1 msec...30 minutes).
NumberOfCaptures
Specifies the maximum number of captures allowed (1...100).
CaptureSizeType
Define how the capture size is specified. Type Samples, TimePeriod, or NoLimit.
CaptureSize
Specify the number of samples for each capture. The maximum number of samples is 2-hours worth of data samples or
1000 samples, whichever is greater. If the CaptureSizeType is Samples, the range is 1...(2 hours/SamplePeriod) or 1000
samples, whichever is greater. If the CaptureSizeType is TimePeriod, the range is SamplePeriod...2 hours or
(SamplePeriod * 1000), whichever is greater.
StartTriggerType
Specify the type of the start trigger. Type NoTrigger or EventTrigger.
StartTriggerTag1
Specify the tag name of the first start trigger. The name must be one of the pen names.
StartTriggerOperation1
Specify the operation that is applied on StartTriggerTag1, and StartTriggerTargetValue1 or StartTriggerTargetTag1.

Enter:
For:
0
Exact Equal (Tag EQU Target)
1
Trigger Level Equal (Tag = Target)
2
Not Equal (Tag != Target)
3
Less Than (Tag < Target)
4
Greater Than (Tag > Target)
5
Less Than or Equal To (Tag <= Target)
6
Greater Than or Equal To (Tag >= Target)
7
Positive Slope (slope of Tag is positive)
8
Negative Slope (slope of Tag is negative)
9
Bitwise OR ((Tag OR Target) = 0)
10
Bitwise OR ((Tag OR Target) != 0)
11
Bitwise AND ((Tag AND Target) = 0)
12
Bitwise AND ((Tag AND Target) != 0)
13
Bitwise XOR ((Tag XOR Target) = 0)
14
Bitwise XOR ((Tag XOR Target) != 0)
StartTriggerTargetType1
Specify the type of the first start trigger target. Type TargetValue or TargetTag. If you type TargetValue,
StartTriggerTargetValue1 is expected. Otherwise, StartTriggerTargetTag1 is expected.
StartTriggerTargetValue1
Specify a target value if the StartTriggerTargetType1 is TargetValue. Type a binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal
integer number or type a floating point number.
StartTriggerTargetTag1
Specify a target tag if the StartTriggerTargetType is TargetTag. The tag must be one of the pen names.
StartTriggerLogicalOperation
Specify a logical operation (AND or OR) that is performed on StartTriggerxxx1 and StartTriggerxxx2. StartTriggerxxx1
consists of StartTriggerTag1, StartTriggerOperation1, StartTriggerTargetType1, and StartTriggerTargetValue1 or
StartTriggerTargetTag1. StartTriggerxxx2 consists of StartTriggerTag2, StartTriggerOperation2,
StartTriggerTargetType2, and StartTriggerTargetValue2 or StartTriggerTargetTag2.
StartTriggerTag2
Specify the tag name of the second start trigger. The name must be one of the pen names.
240
Chapter 15
Attribute
Description
StartTriggerOperation2
Specify the operation that is applied on StartTriggerTag2, and StartTriggerTargetValue2 or StartTriggerTargetTag2.

Type:
For:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
StartTriggerTargetType2
Specify the type of the second start trigger target. Type TargetValue or TargetTag. If you type TargetValue,
StartTriggerTargetValue2 is expected. Otherwise, StartTriggerTargetTag2 is expected.
StartTriggerTargetValue2
Specify a target value if the StartTriggerTargetType2 is TargetValue. Type a binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal
StartTriggerTargetTag2
Specify a target tag if the StartTriggerTargetType is TargetTag. The tag must be one of the pen names.
PreSampleType
Define how pre-samples are specified. Type Samples or TimePeriod.
PreSamples
Specify the number of pre-samples (0...1000) if the PreSampleType is Samples. Specify a time period (0...(SamplePeriod
1000)) that covers pre-samples if the PreSampleType is TimePeriod.
StopTriggerType
Specify the type of the stop trigger. Type NoTrigger or Event Trigger.
StopTriggerTag1
Specify the tag name of the first trigger. The name must be one of the pen names.
StopTriggerOperation1
Specify the operation that is applied on StopTriggerTag1 and StopTriggerTargetValue1 or StopTriggerTargetTag1.

Type:
For:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
StopTriggerTargetType1
Specify the type of the first stop trigger target. Type TargetValue or TargetTag. If you specify TargetValue,
StopTriggerTargetValue1 is expected. Otherwise, StopTriggerTargetTag1 is expected.
StopTriggerTargetValue1
Specify a target value if the StopTriggerTargetType1 is TargetValue. Type a binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal
StopTriggerTargetTag1
Specify a target tag if the StopTriggerTargetType is TargetTag. The name must be one of the pen names.
241
Chapter 15
Attribute
Description
StopTriggerLogicalOperation
Specify a logical operation (AND or OR) that is performed on StopTriggerxxx1 and StopTriggerxxx2. StopTriggerxxx1
consists of StopTriggerTag1, StopTriggerOperation1, StopTriggerTargetType1, and StopTriggerTargetValue1 or
StopTriggerTargetTag1. StopTriggerxxx2 consists of StopTriggerTag2, StopTriggerOperation2, StopTriggerTargetType2,
and StopTriggerTargetValue2 or StopTriggerTargetTag2.
StopTriggerTag2
Specify the tag name of the second trigger. The name must be one of the pen names.
StopTriggerOperation2
Specify the operation that is applied on StopTriggerTag2 and StopTriggerTargetValue2 or StopTriggerTargetTag2.

Type:
For:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
StopTriggerTargetType2
Specify the type of the second stop trigger target. Type TargetValue or TargetTag. If you specify TargetValue,
StopTriggerTargetValue2 is expected. Otherwise, StopTriggerTargetTag2 is expected.
StopTriggerTargetValue2
Specify a target value if the StopTriggerTargetType2 is TargetValue. Type a binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal
StopTriggerTargetTag2
Specify a target tag if the StopTriggerTargetType is TargetTag. The name must be one of the pen names.
PostSampleType
Define how post-samples are specified. Type Samples or TimePeriod.
PostSamples
Specify the number of post-samples (0...1000) if the PostSampleType is Samples. Specify a time period
(0...(SamplePeriod 1000)) that covers post-samples if the PostSampleType is TimePeriod.
TrendxVersion
Specify the version of the Trend feature.
Pen declaration
A trend object can have as many as eight pen declarations. A pen declaration
follows this structure.
L5X pen structure

<Pen [Pen_Attributes]>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ text ]]>
</Description>
</Pen>
242
Chapter 15
L5K PEN structure

PEN <pen_name> [(Description := "text", Pen_Attributes)];
END_PEN
Pen elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
pen_name
The name of the pen.
Description
Description
In L5X, use a Name attribute on the <Pen> element.

User information about the pen.
Pen attributes
Attribute
Description
Name
L5X only. Specify the name of the pen.
Color
Specify the color of the line in RGB format. Type the hex number for the color (16#0000_0000 16#00FF_FFFF).
Visible
Specify whether or not the line should be visible. Type TRUE or FALSE.
Width
Specify the width of the line in pixels (1...10).
Type
Specify the line type. Type Analog, Digital, or Full-Width.
Style
Specify the style of line.

Type:
For:
0
.
1

2
...........
3
. . .
4
.. .. ..
Marker
Specify the line marker (0...83)
Min
Specify the minimum value for the pen. The minimum cannot be greater than or equal to the maximum.
Max
Specify the maximum value for the pen. The maximum cannot be less than or equal to the minimum.
EngUnits
Specify engineering units. For example, rpm, gallon, fps, and degrees.
243
Chapter 15
Trend guidelines
Examples
Observe these guidelines when defining a trend:
A trend can support as many as eight pen declarations.
Export just the trend of a controller project by right-clicking the trend in

the Controller Organizer and choosing Export. This saves the trend as a
.L5X file (XML format) in the same format as described above for the trend
section in the complete project .L5K file.
To import a trend .L5X file into a controller project, right-click Trends in

the Control Organizer and select Import.
L5X Trend example
L5K TREND Example

TREND trend1 (SamplePeriod := 10,
NumberOfCaptures := 1,
CaptureSizeType := Samples,
CaptureSize := 60000,
StartTriggerType := No Trigger,
StopTriggerType := No Trigger,
TrendxVersion := 5.2)
Template :=
[208,207,17,224,161,177,26,225,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
62,0,3,0,254,255,9,0,6,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,0,0,0,1,0,0,0,0,
0,0,0,0,16,0,0,2,0,0,0,1,0,0,0,254,255,255,255,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
255,255,255,255,255,255,....
PEN Local:1:I.CHA_Status (Color := 16#00ff_0000,
Visible := 1,
Width := 1,
Type := Analog,
Style := 0,
Marker := 0,
Min := 0.0,
Max := 100.0)
244
Chapter 15
END_PEN
PEN Local:1:I.CHB_Status (Color := 16#0000_ff00,
Visible := 1,
Width := 1,
Type := Analog,
Style := 0,
Marker := 0,
Min := 0.0,
Max := 100.0)
END_PEN
END_TREND
245
Chapter 16
Define a watch list component
Introduction
This chapter explains the overall structure of the watch list component.
Quick watch list component
The quick watch list component defines a collection of tags that you need to
monitor on the fly or for a period of time. A quick watch list is optional. You can
have multiple watch lists; each watch list can have multiple tags.
L5X QuickWatchList structure

<QuickWatchLists>
<QuickWatchList [QuickWatchListAttributes]>
<WatchTag [WatchTagAttributes] />>
</QuickWatchList>
</QuickWatchLists>
L5K QUICK_WATCH structure

QUICK_WATCH [(Quick_Watch_Attributes)]
WATCH_TAG [(Watch_Tag_Attributes)] ;
END_QUICK_WATCH
Quick Watch elements

L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
QuickWatchLists
N/A
The element that holds quick watch lists.
QuickWatchList
QUICK_WATCH
A quick watch list that holds watch tags.
WatchTag
WATCH_TAG
An individual watch tag within a watch list.
Quick Watch List attributes

Attribute
Description
Name
Specify the name of the quick watch list.
247
Chapter 16
Watch tag attributes

Attribute
Description
Specifier
Specify the tag or part of a tag to watch.
Scope
Specify the name of program, equipment phase, or Add-On Instruction that contains the watch tag.
For L5X, the value is empty if the tag is controller scope.
For L5K, the attribute is omitted if the tag is controller scope.
Examples
L5X Quick watch lists example
L5K QUICK_WATCH example

QUICK_WATCH (Name := My_Quick_Watch_2)
WATCH_TAG (Specifier := MyDint);
WATCH_TAG (Specifier := MySint, Scope := My_Program);
WATCH_TAG (Specifier := MyAOI, Scope := My_Program);
WATCH_TAG (Specifier := MyAOI.MyString, Scope :=
MyProgram);
END_QUICK_WATCH
QUICK_WATCH (Name := My_Quick_Watch_1)
248
WATCH_TAG
WATCH_TAG
WATCH_TAG
WATCH_TAG
MyProgram);
END_QUICK_WATCH
(Specifier
(Specifier
(Specifier
(Specifier
:=
:=
:=
:=
Chapter 16
MyDint);
MySint, Scope := My_Program);
MyAOI, Scope := My_Program);
MyAOI.MyString, Scope :=
249
Chapter 17
Define controller configuration objects
Introduction
This chapter explains how to enter project and configuration information in a

complete import/export file.
Controller objects
The config component defines controller objects.
L5X config structure

<CommPorts>
<SerialPort [SerialPort_Attributes]>
<ASCII [ASCII_Attributes]/>
<DF1 [DF1_Attributes]/>
</SerialPort>
</CommPorts>
<CST [CST_Attributes]/>
<WallClockTime [WallClockTime_Attributes]/>
L5K CONFIG structure

CONFIG <object_name> [(Object_Attributes)]
END_CONFIG
Object elements
L5X Item
L5K Item
Description
N/A
object_name
The name of the controller config object.

In L5X, each controller config object is specified with an element specific to that object.
Controller objects are optional. There can be only one of each controller object in
an import/export file. Controller objects appear at the end of the import/export
file.
251
Chapter 17
Config attributes
The attributes depend on the type on the object. Some objects do not have any
attributes.
Object
Attribute
Description
ASCII
XONXOFFEnable
Specify whether to regulate the flow of incoming data. Type 0 to disable XON/XOFF; type
1 to enable XON/XOFF.
DeleteMode
Specify the delete mode. Type 0 for Ignore; type 1 for CRT; or type 2 for Printer.
EchoMode
Specify whether to echo data back to the device from which it was sent. Type 0 to
disable; type 1 to enable.
TerminationChars
Specify the characters that designate the end of a line.
AppendChars
Specify the characters to append to the end of a line.
BufferSize
Specify the maximum size of the data array (1...65535 bytes) to send and receive.
CST
SystemTimeMasterIDn (L5K)
MasterID (L5X)
Specify whether the controller is the coordinated system time master. Type 16#0000 if
the controller is not the CST master; type 16#0001 if the controller is the CST master.
DF1
DuplicateDetection
Specify whether to enable duplicate message detection, which ignores duplicate

messages. Type 0 to disable; type 1 to enable.
ErrorDetection
Specify the error detection method. Type BCC Error or CRC Error.
EnbeddedResponseEnable
Specify the response method. Type 0 to autodetect; type 1 to enable.
DF1Mode
Specify the DF1 mode. Type Pt to Pt, Master, or Slave.
ACKTimeout
Specify the time to wait for an acknowledgment to a message transmission. Type an

increment of 20 ms (0...32767).
NAKReceiveLimit
Specify the number of NAKS (0...127) the controller can receive in response to a message
before stopping transmission.
ENQTransmit
Specify the number of inquiries (0...127) the controller sends after an ACK timeout.
TransmitRetries
Specify the number of attempted retries (0...127) without getting an acknowledgment

before the message is deemed undeliverable.
StationAddress
Specify the current station link address (0...254).
ReplyMessageWait
Specify the time the master waits after receiving an acknowledgment to a masterinitiated message before polling the slave for a response. Type an increment of 20 ms
(0...65535).
PollingMode
Specify the polling mode. Type one of these:

1 for Message Based (slave can initiate messages)
2 for Message Based (slave cannot initiate messages)
3 for Standard (multiple message transfer for node scan)
4 for Standard (single message transfer per node scan)
252
MasterMessageTransmit
Specify when the master transmits. Type 0 to transmit between station polls; type 1 to
transmit in poll sequence.
NormalPollNodeFile
Specify the tag name of the structure that contains the normal poll node list, or type
<NA>. The tag must specify Class = Standard.
NormalPollGroupSize
Specify the total number (0...255) of active stations polled from the poll list.
PriorityPollNodeFile
Specify the tag name of the structure that contains the priority poll node list, or type
<NA>. The tag must specify Class = Standard.
Chapter 17
Object
Attribute
Description
DF1
ActiveStationFile
Specify the tag name of the structure that contains the status (active or non-active) of
each node, or type <NA>. The tag must specify Class = Standard.
SlavePollTimeout
Specify the amount of time the master waits for an acknowledgment to a message sent
to a slave. Type an increment of 20 ms (0...65535).
EOTSuppression
Specify whether to enable EOT suppression. Type 0 to disable; type 1 to enable.
MaxStationAddress
Specify the maximum station address (0...31).
TokenHoldFactor
Specify the token hold factor (1...4).
EnableStoreFwd
For DF1 radio modem, specify whether to enable the store and forward feature. Type 0 to
disable; type 1 to enable.
StoreFwdFile
Specify the INT tag that holds the store and forward table.
Channel (L5X only)
Specify the serial port.
BaudRate
Specify the communication rate for the serial port. Type 110, 300 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400.
Parity
Specify the parity setting for the serial port. Parity provides additional message-packet
error detection. Type None Parity, Even Parity, or Odd Parity.
DataBits
Specify the number of bits per message packet. Type 7 Data Bits or 8 Data Bits.
StopBits
Specify the number of stop bits to the device with which the controller is communicating.
Type 1 Stop Bit or 2 Stop Bit.
ComDriverId
Specify the type of serial driver. Type DF1.
PendingComDriverId
L5K only. Specify type of serial driver. Type DF1.
RTSOffDelay
Specify a time delay to make sure the modem successfully transmits the entire message.
Type an increment of 20 ms (0...32767). Normally leave at zero.
RTSSendDelay
Specify a time delay to let the modem prepare to transmit a message. Type an increment
of 20 ms (0...32767).
ControlLine
Specify the mode in which the serial driver operates. Type No Handshake, Full Duplex,
Half Duplex without Continuous Carrier, or Half Duplex with Continuous
Carrier.
PendingControlLine
L5K only. Specify the mode in which the serial driver operates. Type No Handshake,
Full Duplex, Half Duplex without Continuous Carrier, or Half Duplex with
Continuous Carrier.
RemoteModeChangeFlag
Specify whether there is a remote change. Type 0 or 1.
PendingRemoteModeChangeFlag
L5K only. Specify whether there is a remote change. Type 0 or 1.
ModeChangeAttentionChar
Specify the mode change attention character.
PendingModeChangeAttentionChar
L5K only. Specify the mode change attention character.
SystemModeCharacter
Specify the system mode character.
PendingSystemModeCharacter
L5K only. Specify the system mode character.
SerialPort
SerialPort
UserModeCharacter
Specify the user mode character.
PendingSystemModeCharacter
L5K only. Specify the user mode character.
Serial Port (cont)
DCDWaitDelay
For DF1 radio modem, specify the delay in seconds (0...255). Specify this value if
ControlLine is Half-Duplex and ContinuousCarrier is disabled.
WallClockTime
LocalTimeAdjustment
Specify any local time adjustment.
TimeZone
Specify the time zone.
253
Chapter 17
Object
Attribute
Description
Internet Protocol
ConfigType
Specify the IP configuration type.

Values include Manual, BOOTP, or DHCP.
Ethernet Port
IPAddress
Specify the IP Address.
SubnetMask
Specify the Subnet Mask.
Gateway
Specify the Gateway.
PrimaryDNS
Specify the Primary DNS.
SecondaryDNS
Specify the Secondary DNS.
DomainName
Specify the Domain Name.
HostName
Specify the Host Name.
Port
This is the Ethernet Port number being configured. (L5X only)
PortEnabled
Specifies if the port is Enabled or Disabled.
AutoNegotiateEnabled
Specifies if Auto Negotiate is Enabled or Disabled.
InterfaceSpeed
Specifies the Interface Speed in Mbps.

Valid values are 10 or 100.
DuplexMode
Specifies the Duplex Mode.

Valid values are Half or Full.
Ethernet Network
SupervisorModeEnabled
Specify if the ring supervisor mode of the controller is Enabled.
SupervisorPrecedence
Specifies the Supervisor Precedence.

A numerically higher value indicates higher precedence.
Values are in the range of 0...255.
BeaconInterval
Specifies the Beacon Interval for the ring.

Values are in the range of 100...100000 usec.
BeaconTimeout
Specifies the Beacon Timeout for the ring.

Values are in the range of 200...500000 usec.
VLANID
Specifies the Ring Protocol VLAN ID of the ring.

Values are in the range of 0... 4094
254
Examples
Chapter 17
L5X Config example
L5K CONFIG Examples
This example shows a DF1 controller object.

CONFIG DF1
DuplicateDetection := -1,
ErrorDetection := BCC Error,
EmbeddedResponseEnable := -1,
DF1Mode := Pt to Pt,
ACKTimeout := 50,
NAKReceiveValue := 3,
DF1ENQs := 3,
DF1Retries := 3,
StationAddress := 0,
ReplyMessageWait := 50,
PollingMode := 0,
MasterMessageTransmit := 0,
NormalPollNodeFile := NA,
NormalPollGroupSize := 0,
PriorityPollNodeFile := NA,
ActiveStationFile := NA)
END_CONFIG
This example shows a SerialPort controller object.

CONFIG SerialPort
(BaudRate := 19200,
Parity := No Parity,
DataBits := 8 Bits of Data,
StopBits := 1 Stop Bit,
ComDriverId := DF1,
RTSOffDelay := 0,
RTSSendDelay := 0,
ControlLine := No Handshake,
255
Chapter 17
UserModeCharacter := 85)
END_CONFIG
256
Chapter 18
Introduction
This chapter explains how to define custom properties in a controller project.

Custom properties can be used to store any additional information that should
persist with the project. This information is imported with the project,
downloaded to the controller, uploaded from the controller, and exported with
the project. Custom properties can be added to most XML elements in the L5X
format. For example, you can add it to the controller, data types, data type
members, modules, add-on instructions, tags, programs, routines, rungs, sheets,
various instructions, various collections, ST lines, trends, and so on. However, you
cannot add custom properties to custom properties. Custom properties are
compatible only with the L5X format.
Custom property data is well-formed XML limited to chunks of 65000 bytes. To
associate more thank 65K of data on a single parent object, break it into multiple
sections using the extension attribute. This optional attribute is a free-form string,
so you can organize custom properties information in any way you need.
Custom properties data
The following sections describe custom properties data.
Custom properties structure

Custom Properties should be the first child xml element under the parent
element.
<ParentXmlObject >
<CustomProperties>
<Provider ID="YourCompanyName" Ext="Part 1" >
<YourData YourAttrib="Your Value" />
<YourOtherData Attrib2="2" >
<YourChildElement Attrib3="3" />
</YourOtherData>
</Provider>
<Provider ID="YourCompanyName" Ext="Part 2" >
<![CDATA[ Your custom property data wrapped
in CData ]]>
</Provider>
<Provider ID="ToolMakerX" >
<ToolMakerData >Custom property data from a
tool you are using</ToolMakerData>
257
Chapter 18
</Provider>
</CustomProperties>
(the rest of the ParentObjects child elements)
</ParentXmlObject >
Custom properties elements

L5X item
Description
CustomProperties
The collection of Provider elements.
Provider
Unique element that wraps the users custom property XML. The XML between this
beginning and end element must be well-formed.
Custom properties attributes
Example
Attribute
Description
ID
The provider attribute which identifies the owner of this custom property data. This is a free-form
string. It could identify your company, or it might come from a third party (OEM) component or tool
that you are using.
Ext
(Optional) This extension attribute flags custom property data when you need to break it into
multiple Provider sections. This is a free-form string. An attribute with an empty string is the same
as not having the attribute.
The following example demonstrates adding custom properties for a tag:

<Tag Name="MyTag" TagType="Base" DataType="DINT"
Radix="Decimal" Constant="false" ExternalAccess="Read/Write">
<CustomProperties>
<Provider ID="CompanyX" >
<CompanXTextData > Your Xml data as a Text
Node </CompanXTextData>
</Provider>
</CustomProperties>
<Data Format="L5K">
<![CDATA[42]]>
</Data>
<DataValue DataType="DINT" Radix="Decimal"
Value="42"/>
</Data>
</Tag>
258
Chapter 19
Structure Tags and Comments in an

Import/Export File
Introduction
This chapter explains how to structure the import/export file by using commas (in
a CSV text file) or tabs (in a TXT Unicode text file) to separate values in the file.
Place information in a .CSV

or .TXT file
The structured import/export file contains these components for comments and
other information.
Item
Identifies
Remark
Comment within the file.
TAG
Tag.
RCOMMENT
Rung comment.
TEXTBOX
Text box comment.

Enter comments to document import files. The import process ignores these
comments. Place comments anywhere in an import/export file, except in names
and descriptions. Enter comments by starting the line (record) with REMARK
and a comma.
Specify a tag record
Each tag record defines a tag within a controller project. A tag record includes this
information.
Item
Identifies
Type
The type of tag.

TAG
tag
ALIAS
alias tag
COMMENT tag operand component
Scope
The part of the project that owns the tag.

If no scope is specified, the scope is controller.
If a scope is specified, it identifies the program or equipment phase.
Name
Name of the tag
Description
Description of the tag (optional)

259
Chapter 19
Structure Tags and Comments in an Import/Export File
Item
Identifies
Datatype
Datatype of the tag - use any valid datatype name
Specifier
Optional
An alias, specifies base tag.
A tag comment, specifies the tag name and member or bit.
Attributes
The attributes of the tag, as exported in the L5K format.

Define how the tag can be used and how it appears.
Attributes do not include tag values.
TAG type record

Each TAG record defines a tag within a controller project.
TAG Structure with Commas
TAG,"Scope","Name","Description","Datatype","Specifier","At
tributes"
TAG Structure with Tabs

TAG,"Scope" "Name"
"Attributes"
"Description"
Specify tag dimensions on the Datatype.
260
To specify:
Type:
1 dimension
[a]
2 dimensions
[a,b]
3 dimensions
[a,b,c]
"Datatype"
"Specifier"
Chapter 19
This example shows TAG records in a CSV format.
ALIAS type record

Each ALIAS record defines an alias within a controller project.
ALIAS Structure with Commas
ALIAS,"Scope","Name","Description","Datatype","Specifier","
Attributes"
ALIAS Structure with Tabs

ALIAS "Scope" "Name" "Description"
"Specifier" "Attributes"
"Datatype"
This example shows ALIAS records in a CSV format.
COMMENT type record

Each COMMENT record defines a comment about a component of a tag, such as
a bit member, structure member, or an array element.
COMMENT Structure with Commas
COMMENT,"Scope","Name","Description","Datatype","Specifier"
,"Attributes"
COMMENT Structure with Tabs

COMMENT "Scope" "Name" "Description","Datatype"
"Specifier" "Attributes"
261
Chapter 19
This example shows COMMENT records in a CSV format.
Specify a comment record
Each comment record defines a rung comment or text box in the controller
project. This is different than the comment type that defines a comment about a
tag component. A comment record includes this information.
Item
Identifies
Type
The type of comment.

RCOMMENT ladder rung comment
TEXTBOX function block or sequential function chart comment
Scope
The part of the project that owns the comment.

A program or equipment phase must be specified.
Routine
Name of the routine.
Comment
Text of the comment.
Owning Element
For RCOMMENT entries, neutral text for the last instruction on the rung that owns the comment.
If there is no element on the rung, the Owning Element is a semi-colon (;).
By default, the Owning Element is used to match the comment to a rung on import.
For a TEXTBOX entry of an attached text box, neutral text identifies the element attached to the the text box. The
Owning Element contains the backing tag name and the full specifier of the element, including the absolute location
of the element.
Owning Element.
For a TEXTBOX entry of a free-floating text box, this entry is blank.
Location
For RCOMMENT entries, the rung number of comment. The rung number in the Location column is used to match the
comment to a rung if the Owning Element is blank for that comment or if you override the import default by selecting
Match all RLL rung comments by rung number only.
For TEXTBOX entries, the absolute location of free-floating text boxes or the relative location from the owning element
of attached text boxes. For absolute locations, the location contains both the sheet number and the X and Y
coordinates of the text box. For relative locations, the location contains only the X and Y coordinates.
An RCOMMENT record follows this format.
RCOMMENT Structure with Commas

RCOMMENT,"Scope","Routine","Comment","Owning
Element","Location"
RCOMMENT Structure with Tabs

Element"
262
RCOMMENT
"Location"
"Scope"
"Routine"
"Comment"
"Owning
Chapter 19
A TESTBOX record follows this format.
TEXTBOX Structure with Commas

TEXBOX,"Scope","Routine","Comment","Owning
Element","Location"
TEXTBOX Structure with Tabs

Element"
TEXTBOX
"Location"
"Scope"
"Routine"
"Comment"
"Owning
This example shows comment records in a CSV format.
Specify an alarm message

record
An alarm tag can have several alarm message strings for different alarm conditions
in different languages. An alarm message record includes this information.
Item
Identifies
Type
The alarm message and its associated language as: ALMMSG:language

Languages: EN-US (United States English), DE (Germany German), ES (Spain Spanish), FR (France French), IT (Italian),
PT (Brazil Portuguese), JA (Japanese), KO (Korean), ZH (Chinese)
Scope
The part of the project that owns the comment.

A program or equipment phase must be specified.
Name
Name of the associated alarm tag.
Description
Text of the alarm message.
Datatype
The type of alarm. Specify ALARM_DIGITAL or ALARM_ANALOG.
263
Chapter 19
Item
Identifies
Specifier
Specify the type of alarm.

Specify: For:
AM
Digital alarm
HH
High-high analog alarm
H
High analog alarm
L
Low analog alarm
LL
Low-low analog alarm
POS
Rate-of-change positive analog alarm
NEG
Rate-of change negative analog alarm
An ALMMSG record follows this format.
ALMMSG Structure with Commas

ALMMS:language,"Scope","Name","Description","Datatype","
Specifier"
ALMMSG Structure with Tabs

"Datatype"
ALMMSG:language
"Specifier"
"Scope"
"Name"
This example shows alarm message records in a CSV format.
264
"Description"
Examples
Chapter 19
Example .CSV file
These examples use this ladder file.
265
Chapter 19
Export all tags and comments
An export of all tags and comments results in this .CSV file.
266
Chapter 19
Example .TXT file
These examples use the Motor_Starter_Program program file and exports the
program parameters and local tags.
267
Chapter 19
Export program tags and comments
An export of the Motor_Starter_Prorgam program tags and comments results in

this .TXT file.
268
Appendix A
Considerations for using Microsoft Excel to edit a

.CSV file
Introduction
Important:
This appendix describes how using Windows or Excel to edit a .CSV file can affect
the file.
To edit the .CSV file, it is recommended that you use a database program tool, such as Access, or a raw text editor. Many other desktop tools, such as Windows
or Excel, might change the structure of the .CSV file and cause an import of the file to fail.
Recommendations
To use Microsoft Excel to edit your .CSV tag file:
Use single quotes instead of double quotes within descriptions

and comments.
Do not create descriptions or comments that consist only of numbers, have

leading zeros, or have a leading symbol that Microsoft Excel treats specially.
For example, do not create descriptions, such as:
002
+2
=2
-2
.0
Logix Designer data

transformations
Do not create descriptions or comments that start with a +, -, or = symbol.

If you add text after the symbol, Excel displays #NAME? in the cell.
When Logix Designer application exports tags, it performs these conversions.

Original Content
Content in .CSV File After Export
"
$Q
newline
$N$L
tab
$T
$$
269
Appendix A
Considerations for using Microsoft Excel to edit a .CSV file
When you open the exported .CSV file in Excel, Excel makes these conversions.
Microsoft Excel Data

Transformation
Original Content
Content in .CSV File

After Export
Content After
Opening in Excel
Content After Saving Details

from Excel
.0
".0"
Logix Designer addresses this as the specifier for a tag.

If you enter this as an entire comment, you lose any preceding period (.). If
you enter any text before or after this, Excel maintains the content.
=2
"=2"
If you enter this as an entire comment, you lose any preceding equal sign
(=). If you enter any text before or after this, Excel maintains the content.
+2
"+2"
If you enter this as an entire comment, you lose any preceding plus sign (+).
If you enter any text before or after this, Excel maintains the content.
002
"002"
If you enter this as an entire comment, you lose any preceding zeros. If you
enter any text before or after this, Excel maintains the content.
test string
"test string"
test string
test string
Excel puts quotes around cell contents only if there is an embedded comma.
Logix Designer always places double quotes around text. But Logix Designer
still can handle the description without quotes.
"test string"
"$"test string$""
$test string$""
"$test string$"""""
Excel and Logix Designer alter content when it includes a dollar sign ($).
has "quoted text"

within string
"has $"quoted text$"

within string"
has $quoted text$"

within string"
"has $quoted text $""

within string"""
Excel and Logix Designer alter content when it includes a dollar sign ($).
this has embedded

text
this has $embedded$

text
this has $embedded$

text
this has $embedded$

text
Single quotes work in both software packages.
+text
"+text"
?
#NAME
?
#NAME
Do not start a description or comment with a plus sign (+).
-text
"-text"
?
#NAME
?
#NAME
Do not start a description or comment with a minus sign (-).
=text
"=text"
?
#NAME
?
#NAME
Do not start a description or comment with an equal sign (=).
270
Appendix B
Import/Export revision history
Introduction
This appendix contains a history of enhancements made to the import/export

feature since L5K version 1.1, major revision 1, and minor revision 1 that was
included with Logix Designer, version 8.0.
These releases of the import/export feature L5K version correspond to these
releases of Logix Designer and the Logix Designer application.
RSLogix 5000 /Logix Designer Version
Import/Export L5K Version
28.xx
2.19
27.xx
2.18
26.xx
2.17
24.XX
2.15
23.xx
2.14
21.xx
2.12
20.xx
2.11
19.xx
2.10
18.xx
2.9
17.xx
2.8
16.xx
2.7
15.xx
2.6
13.xx
2.4
12.xx
2.3
11.xx
2.2
10.xx
2.1
9.00
2.0
5.02
1.2
8.xx, 7.xx, 6.xx, 2.xx
1.1
1.23, 1.21
1.0
1.11, 1.10
0.4
271
Appendix B
Backward compatibility
The import/export feature supports backward compatibility for import

operations. Therefore, the application can import .L5K or .L5X files that are
generated by a previous version of the programming software. In some cases, an
older .L5K file might not correctly import into a newer version of the application.
The revision history in this appendix lists any conditions when backward
compatibility for an import operation does not work as expected.
The import/export feature does not support backward compatibility for export
operations. Therefore, older versions of the application cannot read .L5K or .L5X
files that are created with newer versions of the application. In some cases, a .L5K
or .L5X file created with a newer version of the application may import with
warnings into an older version of the application. In these cases, attributes on
components may be set to default values during import.
Each version of the application exports .L5K files with a specific import/export
L5K version number. The application imports any .L5K file with the same major
revision number and the same or lower minor revision number. The major L5K
revision number increments when there are conditions such that the application
cannot support backward compatibility for L5K import operations. The minor
L5K revision number increments whenever there is a change in the file, such as a
new module, an attribute is added, or the set of options for an attribute is changed,
that does not affect backward compatibility for L5K import operations.
.L5X files use the XML open standard format. L5X files do not have a revision
number associated with them.
Important:
Use caution when copying and pasting components between different versions of the application. The Logix Designer only supports pasting to the same version
or newer version of the application. Pasting to a prior version of RSLogix 5000 software is not supported. When pasting to a prior version, the paste action may
succeed, but the results may not be what you expect.
Import/Export version 2.19

Logix Designer application
version 28

version 27
272
Version 2.19 of the Import/Export feature that is included with the Logix
Designer application, version 28, includes these major enhancements:
Added Equipment Sequence functionality.
Added the Primary Action Set controller security attribute.
Added the Permission Set controller attribute.
Version 2.18 of the Import/Export feature that is included with the Logix
Designer application, version 27, includes these major enhancements:
Added the custom properties functionality.
Added the DownloadCustomProperties controller attribute.
Added the HMI Button Control (HMIBC) instruction.

version 26
version 24
Appendix B
Version 2.17, major revision 2, minor revision 17, of the Import/Export feature
that is included with the Logix Designer application, does not include any major
enhancements.
that is included with the Logix Designer application, version 24 includes these
major enhancements:
Removed support for the 1789-L60 controller.
Added the ParameterConnections controller element with the EndPoint1

and EndPoint2 attributes.
Added the SafetyEnabled and NATActualAddress module attributes.
Added the SignatureID, SignatureTimestamp, SafetySignatureID Encoded

Add-On Instruction attributes.
Added the Sequencing tag attribute.
Added the Alternate1UpdateMultiplier and Alternate2UpdateMultiplier

motion group tag attributes.
Added the AxisUpdateSchedule axis tag attribute.
Added the UseAsFolder program attribute.
Added the ChildPrograms program element with the child_program_name

attribute.
There were no feature changes for the Import/Export feature for version 2.14,
major revision 2, minor revision 14, included with the Logix Designer application,
version 23.

version 21
included with Logix Designer application, version 21 includes these major
enhancements:
Removed support for the following controllers: 1756-L61, 1756-L61S,

1756-L62, 1756-L62S, 1756-L63, 1756-L63S, 1756-L64, 1756-L65, 1768L43, 1768-L43S, 1768-L45, 1768-L45S, 1769-L23E-QBF1, 1769-L23EQBFC1, 1769-L23-QBFC1, 1769-L31, 1769-L32C, 1769-L32E, 1769L35CR, 1769-L35E
Added the PassThroughConfiguration controller attribute.
273
Appendix B

Logix Designer version 20

Added Engineering Unit, State0, State1, Max, and Min attributes to

datatype and tag components and Add-On Instructions parameters and
local tags.
Added new attributes for analog alarm tags: HHOperShelve, HOperShelve,

LOperShelve, LLOperShelve, ROCPosOperShelve, ROCNegOperShelve,
ProgUnshelveAll, HHOperUnshelve, HOperUnshelve, LOperUnshelve,
LLOperUnshelve, HHMinDurationEnable, HMinDurationEnable,
LMinDurationEnable, LLMinDurationEnable, ROCPosOperUnshelve,
ROCNegOperUnshelve, ShelveDuration, MaxShelveDuration.
Added new attributes for digital alarm tags: OperShelve, ProgUnshelve,

OperUnshelve, ShelveDuration, MaxShelveDuration
Version 2.11, major revision 2, minor revision 11, of the import/export feature
included with Logix Designer, version 20 includes these major enhancements:
Additional controllers supported.
SecurityAuthorityID, SecurityAuthorityURI, ChangesToDetect, and

Trusted Slots attributes added to the controller component.
SignatureRunModeProtect attribute added to the safety controller system.
ShutdownParentOnFault, DrivesADCMode, DrivesADCEnabled, and

UserDefinedCatalogNumber added to the module component.
ConfigScript sub section added to the L5K and L5X formats of the module
component.
Priority, InputConnectionType, OutputRedundantOwner,

InputProductionTrigger, ConnectionPath, InputTagSuffix, and
OutputTagSuffix attributes added to the module connection component.
LargePackageUsage attributed added for message tags.
MasterInputConfigurationBits and MasterPositionFilterBandwidth

attributes added for coordinate system tags.
AdditionalBusCapacitance and InterpolatedPositionConfiguration

attributes added for axis tags.
Internet Protocol, Ethernet Ports, and Ethernet Network controller

configuration objects added for controllers that have embedded Ethernet
ports in them.
Version 2.10 (major revision 2, minor revision 10) of the import/export feature
274
Procedures for configuring source-protected components in encrypted or

clear text format.

Appendix B
ControlLogix 1756-L73 and 1756-L75 controllers added to the list of

processor types.

Addition of ControlLogix 1756-L73 and 1756-L75 controller types and

Compact GuardLogix1768-L43S and 1768-L45S controller types.
Addition of CanUseRPIFromController attribute to the Controller

component.
Addition of the WatchList element to a Controller declaration.
Addition of TagType and AliasFor parameters to the L5X format of the

Add-On Instruction definition
Addition of safety abilities to Add-On Instructions.
Addition of the External Access and Constant attributes to Tag

components.
Addition of new attributes to axis tags,
This version of import/export also supports the AXIS_CIP_DRIVE tag. For

information, see the Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network
Configuration and Startup User Manual, publication MOTION-UM003.

Addition of MinimumRPI, MaximumRPI, and DefaulRPI attributes to ta

produced Tag component.
Addition of attributes to support unicast communication for I/O modules

on EtherNet/IP networks:
Unicast attribute added to the Connection element of the Module

component.
Unicast attribute added to the SafetyProducedTag component.
UnicastPermitted attribute added to the SafetyConsumedTag

component.

1756-L63S GuardLogix safety controller and safety relay ladder

instructions.
275
Appendix B

1756-L65, 1768-L45, 1769-L23E-QB1, 1769-L23E-QBFC1, 1769-L23QBFC1 controllers.
A tag IncludeConnectionStatus attribute is no longer exported.
The L5X format for rung export has been modified such that rung UIDs are
no longer included in the export format.

1756-L61S and 1756-L62S GuardLogix safety controllers and safety relay

ladder instructions.
1756-L64 ControlLogix controller.
Updated CONTROLLER example.
Add-On Instructions.
Alarms
276
New alarm instructions: ALMA, ALMD.
Digital and analog alarm tags.
New instructions
Motion instructions: MCT, MCTP.
Safety instructions: DIN, RIN, ESTOP, ENPEN, LC, FPMS, ROUT,

THRS.
Addition of ShareUnusedTimeSlice and

InhibitAutomaticFirmwareUpdate attributes to the CONTROLLER
component.
Addition of UserDefinedVendor, UserDefinedProductType,

userDefinedProductCode, UserDefinedMajor, and UserDefinedMinor
attributes to the MODULE component.
Addition of LINT data type.
Addition of Unicast and UnicastPermitted attributes to the TAG

component.
Additional attributes and valid values for existing attributes to AXIS tags.
Additional attributes for COORDINATE_SYSTEM tags.
Source protected routines and Add-On-Instructions appear as encrypted

data in export files. In previous releases, source protected data was not
exported at all.
Appendix B
Addition of SynchronizeRedundancyDataAfterExecution attribute to the

PROGRAM component.
Additional CONFIG attributes.
New export TXT format for rungs and logic comments that uses tabs to
separate values. This format is similar to the CSV format that uses commas
to separate values.
The CSV and TXT formats also include text box comments from function
block and sequential function chart logic.


Support for the 1769-L32C, 1769-L32CR CompactLogix and 1768-L43

CompactLogix controllers.
This release also removed support for the 1756-L1 CompactLogix,
1794-L33 FlexLogix, 1769-L20 CompactLogix, 1769-L30 CompactLogix,
and PowerFlex 700 S controllers.

Equipment Phase program type and its relay ladder and structured text
instructions.
ControlLogix and SoftLogix

task.
Information about when an imported file modifies a project so that you

cannot go online and access a previously downloaded controller.
Additional values for the Mode attribute of a MODULE component.
New SERCOS IDN Read and SERCOS IDN Write message types.
New motion AXIS_GENERIC_DRIVE type.
Removal of the DescriptionWidth parameter from the STEP,

TRANSITION, and STOP components in SFC logic.
Addition of an Attributes column to the CSV format for exported tags.
controllers now support 100 programs per

Support for new controllers.
ExtendedProp section to MODULE data.
Support for new TAG attributes.

Attributes can be in any order in an import/export file. The order
shown in this document is the order the attributes export.
277
Appendix B


278
Support for a TREND object in the import/export .L5K file.
New MCSV instruction in ladder logic (chapter 4) and structured text.
Online editing support for structured text and sequential function chart
logic.
Updated CSV format now includes rung comments.
New L5X format for partial import/export of ladder rungs, tags, and trends.

included with Logix Designer, version 12.01 includes these major enhancements:
The structured text component changed from STX_ROUTINE

to ST_ROUTINE. The LanguageType attribute in SFC routines for
embedded structured text also changed from STX to ST.
Support for new controllers.
Addition of the ControlNetSignature attribute to the MODULE

component.
Addition of the ProgrammaticallySendEventTrigger attribute to the TAG

component.
New COORDINATE_SYSTEM tag.
Addition of several new attributes to the axis tag types.
Addition of DisableFlag attribute to the PROGRAM component.
Addition of EventTrigger and EventTag attributes to the TASK

component to support Event tasks.
New EVENT, IOT, MCCD, MCCM, MCLM, MCS, MCSD, and MCSR
instructions in ladder logic and structured text.
Addition of information regarding the LOGIC block when exporting

online function block logic.
Addition of new modules and their valid CommMethod and

ConfigMethod values.

Support for the 1756-L63 controller.
New controller attributes to support sequential function charts.
Corrected the DATATYPE attributes and added the FamilyType attribute.
Additional information for the CompatibleModule and KeyMask

attributes of the MODULE component.
Appendix B
Addition of RSNetWorxFileName attribute to the MODULE component.
Addition of SFC_ACTION, SFC_STEP, and SFC_STOP tag types.
Addition of 38400 as a supported serial port baud rate.
Addition of structured text instructions.
Addition of EOT, SFR, and SFP instructions to relay ladder and structured
text.
Addition of sequential function chart components.
Addition of an appendix that lists the valid CommMethod and

ConfigMethod values for the supported I/O modules.
Beginning with version 2.2, multi-line rung comments with hard returns are no
longer exported as one long string in double-quotes. Instead, each line of a multiline rung comment is on a separate line in the .L5K file with double-quotes around
each line. When imported, the multiple quoted strings are concatenated to form
the rung comment. This improves the readability of the .L5K text file by using the
existing multiple-string capability of the rung comment syntax. Older formats still
work on import.


Removal of the characters when specifying a controller type.
Addition of the SecurityCode attribute to the Controller object.
Enhancements to the Message tag structure. See page 264 on page 279.
The Program object now includes a Mode attribute.
Correction to valid values for Watchdog and Rate attributes of the

Task object.
Addition of MaxStationAddress and TokenHoldFactor attributes to the

Config DF1 object.
Addition of new instructions: SIZE, SWPB, LOWER, and UPPER.
The NumberOfAppendChars of the Config ASCII object is no longer

exported. If you have an import/export file with any of these attributes, the
file will correctly import into the software. This attributes will be removed
when you export the file.
Changes to support MESSAGE tag enhancements

Version 2.1 (major revision 2, minor revision 1) of the import/export feature that
is included with Logix Designer 2 programming software, version 10.0 made
279
Appendix B
significant changes to the MESSAGE tag. For reference, this table shows the
MESSAGE tag structure of the previous import/export release.
MESSAGE Tag Structure (Version 2.0)
280
Attribute
Description
Description
Provide information about the tag.

Specify Description := "text"
Comment

Specify Comment<specifier> := "text"
.bitnumberfor a bit in the tag
[element]for an array element of the tag
.membernamefor a structure member of the tag
MessageType
Type Block Transfer Read, Block Transfer Write, CIP Data Table Read, CIP Data Table Write, CIP Generic,
PLC2 Unprotected Read, PLC2 Unprotected Write, PLC3 Typed Read, PLC3 Typed Write, PLC3 Word Range
Read, PLC3 Word Range Write, PLC5 Typed Read, PLC5 Typed Write, PLC5 Word Range Read, PLC5 Word
Range Write, SLC Typed Read, or SLC Typed Write.
Specify MessageType := text
RequestedLength
Specify the number of elements in the message instruction (0...32,767).

Specify RequestedLength := value
ConnectionPath
Specify the connection path to the other device.

Specify ConnectionPath := string
DF1DHFlag
If the communication method uses DH+, type 1. If the communication method does not use DH+, type 0.
Specify DF1DHFlag := value
LocalTag
Specify the tag name of the element in the local device.

Specify LocalTag := text
RemoteElement
Specify the tag name of the element in the remote device.

Specify RemoteElement := value
DHPlusSourceLink
If the communication method uses DH+, specify the source link (0...65,535).
Specify DHPlusSourceLink := value
DHPlusDestinationLink
If the communication method uses DH+, specify the destination link (0...65,535).
Specify DHPlusDestinationLink := value
DHPlusDestinationNode
If the communication method uses DH+, specify the destination node number (0...63 octal).
Specify DHPlusDestinationNode := value
DHPlusChannel
If the communication method uses DH+, specify the DH+ channel. Type A or B.
Specify DHPlusChannel := letter
CacheConnections
If the message is to cache connections, type TRUE. If the message is not to cache connections, type FALSE.
Specify CacheConnections := text
ServiceCode
If the message type is CIP Generic, specify the service code (0...255 hexadecimal).
Specify ServiceCode := #16value
ObjectType
If the message type is CIP Generic, specify the object type (0...65,535 hexadecimal).
Specify ObjectType := 16#value
TargetObject
If the message type is CIP Generic, specify the target object (0...65,535 decimal).
Specify TargetObject := value
Attribute
Description
AttributeNumber
If the message type is CIP Generic, specify the attribute number (0...65,535 hexadecimal).
Specify AttributeNumber := 16#value
DestinationTag
Specify the tag name of the destination element.

Specify DestinationTag := text

Important:
Appendix B
Version 2.0 (major revision 2, minor revision 0) of the import/export feature

Replaced the AXIS tag with AXIS_CONSUMED, AXIS_SERVO,

AXIS_SERVO_DRIVE, and AXIS_VIRTUAL tags.
For any attribute that you can specify a not applicable state, type <NA>,
rather than NA.
Revised manual that includes a description and example of the STRING

data type.
Version 9 of Logix Designer only supports ControlLogix processors.
Motion changes to support

the SERCOS Protocol

included with Logix Designer, version 9.0 includes significant changes to motionrelated tags to support the SERCOS protocol.
CoarseUpdatePeriod and AutoTagUpdate parameters were added to the

MOTION_GROUP tag to support SERCOS. For reference, the previous
structure is described on page 267 on page 282.
Earlier versions of the import/export feature supported one AXIS tag. To

support SERCOS, the import/export feature replaced AXIS with four axis
tags: AXIS_CONSUMED, AXIS_SERVO, AXIS_SERVO_DRIVE, and
AXIS_VIRTUAL. The previous AXIS tag is incorporated into these new
tags, but no longer exists as its own tag. For reference, the AXIS structure is
described on page 267 on page 282.
If you have a version 8.0 import/export file with AXIS tags that you
import into version 9.0 software, after changing the import/export
version line to 2.0), the AXIS tags convert to:
If the AXIS type is:
It Converts to:
Unused
AXIS_SERVO
Position only
AXIS_SERVO
281
Appendix B
If the AXIS type is:
It Converts to:
Servo
AXIS_SERVO
Consumed
AXIS_CONSUMED
Virtual
AXIS_VIRTUAL
MOTION_GROUP tag structure (version 1.1)

Attribute
Description
Description

Comment

GroupType
Specify the type of motion group, such as Independent.

Specify GroupType := text
CoarseUpdateMultiplier
Specify the coarse update rate (5-320ms).

Specify CoarseUpdateMultiplier := value
ServoUpdatePeriod
Specify the servo update period in milliseconds (any positive number)

Specify ServoUpdatePeriod := value
PhaseShift
Specify the phase shift (0-65,535).

Specify PhaseShift := value
GeneralFaultType
Specify whether an error generates a major fault or a non-major fault. Type Major Fault or Non Major Fault.
Specify GeneralFaultType := text
AXIS tag structure (version 1.1)

AXIS tag attributes (version 1.1)
Attribute
Description
Description

282
Attribute
Description
Comment

MotionGroup
Type the name of the associated motion group, or type NA.

Specify MotionGroup := text
MotionModule
Type the name of the associated motion module, or type NA.

Specify MotionModule := text
AxisState
Type Axis-Ready, Direct Drive Control, Servo Control, Axis Faulted, or Axis Shutdown.
Specify AxisState := text
PositionUnits
Specify the type of units.

Specify PositionUnits := text
TimeUnits
Type Seconds or Minutes.

Specify TimeUnits := text
InstructionSpeedUnits
Type Percentage or Engineering Units.

Specify InstructionSpeedUnits := text
InstructionAccelDecelUnits
Type Percentage or Engineering Units.

Specify InstructionAccelDecelUnits := text
InstructionMoveProfile
Type Trapezoidal or S-Curve.

Specify InstructionMoveProfile := text
InstructionJogProfile
Specify Trapezoidal or S-Curve.

Specify InstructionJogProfile := text
ConversionConstant
Specify the conversion constant. Type a real number from 1.0...1.0e9.

Specify ConversionConstant := value
HomeMode
Type Passive or Active.

Specify HomeMode := text
HomeSequenceType
Type Immediate Home, Home To Switch, Home To Marker Only, or Home To Switch With Marker.
Specify HomeSequenceType := text
HomePosition
Specify the home position (any positive number).

Specify HomePosition := value
HomeSpeed
Specify the home speed (any positive number).

Specify HomeSpeed := value
HomeReturnSpeed
Specify the home return speed (any positive number).

Specify HomeReturnSpeed := value
MaximumSpeed
Specify the maximum speed (any positive number).

Specify MaximumSpeed := value
MaximumAcceleration
Specify the maximum acceleration (any positive number).

Specify MaximumAcceleration := value
MaximumDeceleration
Specify the maximum deceleration (any positive number).

Specify MaximumDeceleration := value
ProgrammedStopMode
Type Fast Stop, Fast Shutdown, or Hard Shutdown.

Specify ProgrammedStopMode := text
Appendix B
283
Appendix B
Attribute
Description
AverageVelocityTimebase
Specify the average velocity timebase (any positive number).

Specify AverageVelocityTimebase := value
ServoStatusUpdateBits
Specify the servo status update bits. Type a hexadecimal number.

Specify ServoStatusUpdateBits := 16#value
MotionConfigurationBits
Specify the motion configuration bits. Type a hexadecimal number.

Specify MotionConfigurationBits := 16#value
AxisType
Type Unused, Position Only, Servo, Consumed, or Virtual.

Specify AxisType := text
PositionUnwind
Specify the unwind position (0-65,535).

Specify PositionUnwind := value
MaximumPositiveTravel
Specify the maximum positive travel (any positive number).

Specify MaximumPositiveTravel := value
MaximumNegativeTravel
Specify the maximum negative travel (any positive number).

Specify MaximumNegativeTravel := value
PositionErrorTolerance
Specify the position error tolerance (any positive number).

Specify PositionErrorTolerance := value
PositionLockTolerance
Specify the position local tolerance (any positive number).

Specify PositionLockTolerance := value
PositionProportionalGain
Specify position proportional gain (any positive number).

Specify PositionProportionalGain := value
PositionIntegralGain
Specify the position integral gain (any positive number).

Specify PositionIntegralGain := value
VelocityFeedforwardGain
Specify the velocity feedforward gain (any positive number).

Specify VelocityFeedforwardGain := value
AcclerationFeedforwardGain
Specify the acceleration feedforward gain (any positive number).

Specify AccelerationFeedforwardGain := value
VelocityProportionalGain
Specify the velocity proportional gain (any positive number).

Specify VelocityProportionalGain := value
VelocityIntegralGain
Specify velocity integral gain (any positive number).

Specify VelocityIntegralGain := value
OutputFilterBandwidth
Specify output filter bandwidth (any positive number).

Specify OutputFilterBandwidth := value
OutputScaling
Specify the output scaling (any positive number).

Specify OutputScaling := value
OutputLimit
Specify the output limit (any positive number).

Specify OutputLimit := value
OutputOffset
Specify output offset (any positive number).

Specify OutputOffset := value
FrictionCompensation
Specify friction compensation (any positive number).

Specify FrictionCompensation := value
SoftOvertravelFaultAction

Specify SoftOvertravelFaultAction := text
PositionErrorFaultAction

Specify PositionErrorFaultAction := text
284
Attribute
Description
EncoderLossFaultAction

Specify EncoderLossFaultAction := text
EncoderNoiseFaultAction

Specify EncoderNoiseFaultAction := text
DriveFaultAction

Specify DriveFaultAction := text
ServoConfigurationBits
Specify the servo configuration bits. Type a hexadecimal number.

Specify ServoConfigurationBits := 16#value
MotorEncoderTestIncrement
Specify the motor encoder test increment (any positive number).

Specify MotorEncoderTestIncrement := value
TuningTravelLimit
Specify the tuning travel limit (any positive number).

Specify TuningTravelLimit := value
TuningSpeed
Specify the tuning speed (any positive number).

Specify TuningSpeed := value
DampingFactor
Specify the damping factor (any positive number).

Specify DampingFactor := value
PositionServoBandwidth
Specify position servo bandwidth (any positive number).

Specify PositionServoBandwidth := value
TuningConfigurationBits
Specify the tuning configuration bits. Type a hexadecimal number.

Specify TuningConfigurationBits := 16#value

Appendix B

Function block instructions and routines.
ASCII instructions.
Verification of all instruction attributes and parameters.
285
Index
A
action
attributes 197
L5K structure 196
L5X structure 196
Add-On Instruction
attributes 174
attributes in FBD 174
component 85
encoded data 96
guidelines 98
in a function block diagram routine 173
in FBD guidelines 98
L5K example 98
L5K source-protected example 98
L5K structure 86
L5K structure in FBD 174
L5X example 98
L5X source-protected example 97
L5X structure 85
L5X structure in FBD 173
local tag 94, 95
local tag attributes 95
parameter 89, 93
parameter attributes 92, 93
routines 87
source-protection 96
tag values 132
alarm analog tag
attributes 112
L5K example 134
L5K structure 111
L5X example 134
L5X structure 111
alarm digital tag
attributes 114
L5K example 134
L5K structure 114
L5X example 134
L5X structure 114
AlarmConfig
L5X structure 116
ALMMSG
record 267
analog alarm message

L5K structure 116
attachment
attributes 179
guidelines 180
L5K structure 179
L5X structure 179
attributes
action 197
Add-On Instruction 174
Add-On Instruction in FBD 174
alarm analog tag 112
alarm digital tag 114
attachment 179
block 172
branch 201
child programs 146
config objects 256
consumed tag 110
controller 52
controller config objects 256
coordinate system tag 127
datatype 66
datatype member 67
directed link 202
equipment phase 143
function block diagram routine 166
icon 171
iref 170
jsr 175
ladder logic routine 154
leg 201
local tag 95
message tag 118
module 72
module connection 78
motion group tag 129
ocon 171
oref 170
parameter 92, 93
parameter connections 239
pen 248
produced tag 110
program 143
quick watch list 251
287
Index
ret 177
rung 155
safety controller 54, 79
safety module 76
safety tag 131
sbr 176
sbrret 199
sequential function chart routine 190
sheet 168
step 194
stop 200
structured text routine 214
tag 109
task 236
text box 179
transition 198
trend 244
watch tag 252
wire 178
axis tag
L5K structure 119
L5X structure 119
B
backward compatibility 276
block
attributes 172
guidelines 173
L5K structure 172
L5X structure 172
boolean values
L5X format 39
branch
attributes 201
L5K structure 156
L5X structure 155
C
child programs
attributes 146
components 145
guidelines 146
L5K example 148
L5K structure 145
288
L5X example 148

L5X structure 146
COMMENT
record 265
comments 26, 28, 46
CSV format 263
internal L5K file 46
internal L5X file 46
TXT Unicode format 263
complete import/export 21, 22, 24, 25
components
basic L5K format 44
basic L5X format 35
child programs 145
config 255
datatype 65
descriptions in L5K 46
descriptions in L5X 46
display style in L5K 47
display style in L5X 39
module 71
program 141
tag 105
task 235
trend 243
condition
L5K structure 199
L5X structure 198
config
component 255
L5K examples 256
L5X examples 256
config objects
attributes 256
L5K structure 255
L5X structure 255
consumed tag
attributes 110
controller
Index
attributes 52
guidelines 55
L5K example 55
L5K safety example 55
L5K structure 50
L5X example 55
L5X safety example 55
L5X structure 49
safety attributes 54
controller config objects 255
attributes 256
L5K examples 256
L5X examples 256
coordinate system tag
attributes 127
L5K structure 127
L5X structure 127
CSV
ALMMSG 267
comment record 265
exporting 26
importing 28
TAG 263
CSV format 263, 273
examples 267
D
data formats
L5X format 39
datatype
attributes 66
bit members 68
component 65
guidelines 69
L5K example 69
L5K structure 65
L5X example 69
L5X structure 65
member attributes 67
members 66, 67
datatype member
attributes 67
bit members 68
L5K structure 67
L5X structure 66
descriptions
L5K format 46
L5X format 46
directed link
attributes 202
guidelines 202
L5K structure 201
L5X structure 201
display style
L5K format 47
L5X format 39
E
encoded data
L5K example 98, 147
L5K structure 96
L5X example 97, 148
L5X structure 96
equipment phase
attributes 143
L5K example 148
L5X example 148
examples
CSV files 267
L5K ADD_ON_INSTRUCTION_DEFINITION 98
L5K ALARM_ANALOG tag 134
L5K ALARM_DIGITAL tag 134
L5K CHILD_PROGRAMS 148
L5K CONFIG 256
L5K CONTROLLER 55
L5K DATATYPE 69
L5K ENCODED_DATA 98, 147
L5K equipment phase PROGRAM 148
L5K FBD_ROUTINE 180
L5K LOGIC 169, 191, 215
L5K MODULE 79
L5K PROGRAM 148
L5K QUICK_WATCH_LIST 252
L5K ROUTINE 156
L5K safety CONTROLLER 55
L5K safety partner MODULE 79
L5K safety TAG 134
L5K safety TASK 237
L5K SFC_ROUTINE 180
L5K source-protected Add-On Instruction 98
289
Index
L5K source-protected routine 147

L5K ST_ROUTINE 215
L5K TAG 134
L5K TASK 237
L5K TREND 248
L5X AddOnInstructionDefinition 98
L5X alarm analog Tag 134
L5X alarm digital Tag 134
L5X ChildPrograms 148
L5X Controller 55
L5X controller config objects 256
L5X DataType 69
L5X EncodedData 97, 148
L5X equipment phase Program 148
L5X FBDContent 169
L5X function block diagram Routine 180
L5X Module 79
L5X Program 148
L5X QuickWatchList 252
L5X Routine 156
L5X safety Controller 55
L5X safety partner Module 79
L5X safety Tag 134
L5X sequential function chart Routine 180
L5X SFCContent 191
L5X source-protected Add-On Instruction 97
L5X source-protected routine 148
L5X STContent 215
L5X structured text Routine 215
L5X Tag 134
L5X Task 237
L5X Trend 248
TXT Unicode files 267
Excel 273
exporting
comments 26
complete project 21, 24
CSV format 26
L5K format 21
L5X format 24
project 21, 24
tags 26
text boxes 26
TXT format 26
290
F
format
CSV 263
TXT Unicode 263
function block diagram
instructions 183
neutral text 183
function block diagram routine
Add-On Instruction attributes 174
attachment attributes 179
attributes 166
component 165
FBDContent 169
jsr attributes 175
L5K example 169, 180
L5K online edits example 169
L5K sheet structure 167
L5K structure 165
L5X example 169, 180
L5X online edits example 169
L5X sheet structure 166
L5X structure 165
LOGIC 169
online edits 169
ret attributes 177
sbr attributes 176
sheet attributes 168
sheet guidelines 168
text box attributes 179
wire attributes 178
function block routine
block attributes 172
icon attributes 171
iref attributes 170
ocon attributes 171
oref attributes 170
G
guidelines
attachment 180
block 173
child programs 146
Index
controller 55
datatype 69
directed link 202
icon 172
iref 171
jsr 175
module 79
ocon 172
oref 171
program 148
ret 177
rung 155
sbr 176
sheet 168
tag 134
task 237
text box 203
trend 248
wire 178
H
history, import/export feature 275
I
icon
attributes 171
guidelines 172
L5K structure 171
L5X structure 171
importing
comments 28
complete project 22, 25
CSV format 28
L5K format 22
L5X format 25
project 22, 25
tags 28
text boxes 28
TXT format 28
initial values 132
L5K structure 132
L5X structure 132
instructions
function block diagram 183
ladder logic 157
structured text 217
internal file comments 46
iref
attributes 170
guidelines 171
L5K structure 170
L5X structure 170
J
jsr
attributes 175
guidelines 175
L5K structure 175
L5X structure 175
L
L5K
exporting 21
file conventions 45
file structure 44
importing 22
L5K structure
action 196
analog alarm message 116
attachment 179
axis tag 119
block 172
branch 156
child programs 145
condition 199
config objects 255
controller 50
datatype 65
datatype member 67
directed link 201
291
Index
encoded data 96
icon 171
iref 170
jsr 175
limithigh 195
limitlow 195
local tag 95
message tag 117
module 71
ocon 171
oref 170
parameter 89, 93
pen 247
preset 195
program 142
ret 176
rung 154
rung branch 156
safety tag 131
sbr 176
sbrret 199
sheet 167
source-protected Add-On Instruction 96
source-protected routine 96
step 193
stop 200
tag 106
tag initial values 132
task 235
text box 178
transition 197
trend 243
wire 177
L5X
boolean attribute values 39
data formats 39
exporting 24
file conventions 38
292
file structure 35
importing 25
L5X structure
action 196
AlarmConfig 116
attachment 179
axis tag 119
block 172
branch 155
child programs 146
condition 198
config objects 255
controller 49
datatype 65
datatype member 66
directed link 201
encoded data 96
icon 171
iref 170
jsr 175
limithigh 195
limitlow 196
local tag 94
message tag 117
module 71
ocon 171
oref 170
parameter 89, 93
pen 247
preset 195
program 141
ret 176
rung 154
rung branch 155
Index
safety tag 130

sbr 176
sbrret 199
sheet 166
source-protected Add-On Instruction 96
step 193
stop 199
tag 105
tag initial values 132
task 235
text box 178
transition 197
trend 243
wire 177
ladder logic
instructions 157
neutral text 157
rung attributes 155
ladder logic routine
attributes 154
component 153
L5K example 156
L5K rung branch structure 156
L5K rung structure 154
L5K structure 153
L5X example 156
L5X rung branch structure 155
L5X rung structure 154
L5X structure 153
rung guidelines 155
language switching 47
leg
attributes 201
limithigh
L5K structure 195
L5X structure 195
limitlow
L5K structure 195
L5X structure 196
local tag
attributes 95
L5K structure 95
L5X structure 94
M
message tag
attributes 118
L5K structure 117
L5X structure 117
Microsoft Excel 273
module
attributes 72
component 71
guidelines 79
L5K example 79
L5K safety partner example 79
L5K structure 71
L5X example 79
L5X structure 71
module connection
attributes 78
L5K structure 76
L5X structure 76
motion group tag
attributes 129
L5K structure 129
L5X structure 129
N
neutral text
function block diagram 183
ladder logic 157
structured text 217
O
objects 255
ocon
attributes 171
guidelines 172
L5K structure 171
L5X structure 171
online edits 169, 191, 215
oref
attributes 170
293
Index
guidelines 171
L5K structure 170
L5X structure 170
P
parameter
attributes 92, 93
L5K structure 89, 93
L5X structure 89, 93
parameter connections
attributes 239
components 239
guidelines 240
L5K example 240
L5K structure 239
L5X example 240
L5X structure 239
pen
attributes 248
L5K structure 247
L5X structure 247
preset
L5K structure 195
L5X structure 195
produced tag
attributes 110
program
attributes 143
component 141
equipment phase attributes 143
guidelines 148
L5K equipment phase example 148
L5K example 148
L5K structure 142
L5X equipment phase example 148
L5X example 148
L5X structure 141
routine encoded data 96
projects 21, 22, 24, 25
Q
quick watch list
attributes 251
294
component 251
L5K example 252
L5K structure 251
L5X example 252
L5X structure 251
watch tag attributes 252
R
RCOMMENT 263
record 265
Remark 263
ret
attributes 177
guidelines 177
L5K structure 176
L5X structure 176
routine
component 153, 165, 189, 213
encoded data 96
in Add-On Instruction 87
L5K example 156, 180
L5K source-protected example 147
L5X example 156, 180, 215
L5X source-protected example 148
source-protection 96
rung
attributes 155
guidelines 155
L5K structure 154
L5X structure 154
rung branch
L5K structure 156
L5X structure 155
S
safety controller
attributes 54, 79
L5K example 55
L5K module example 79
L5K tag example 134
L5X example 55
L5X module example 79
L5X tag example 134
Index
module attributes 76
safety partner module
L5K example 79
L5X example 79
safety tag
attributes 131
L5K example 134
L5K structure 131
L5X example 134
L5X structure 130
sbr
attributes 176
guidelines 176
L5K structure 176
L5X structure 176
sbrret
attributes 199
L5K structure 199
L5X structure 199
sequential function block routine
L5K example 191
sequential function chart
attachment attributes 179
attachment guidelines 180
directed link guidelines 202
text box attributes 179
text box guidelines 203
sequential function chart routine
action attributes 197
attributes 190
branch attributes 201
component 189
directed link attributes 202
L5K action structure 196
L5K attachment structure 179
L5K branch structure 156
L5K condition structure 199
L5K directed link structure 201
L5K example 180
L5K limithigh structure 195
L5K limitlow structure 195
L5K preset structure 195
L5K sbrret structure 199
L5K step structure 193
L5K stop structure 200
L5K structure 190

L5K text box structure 178
L5K transition structure 197
L5X action structure 196
L5X attachment structure 179
L5X branch structure 155
L5X condition structure 198
L5X directed link structure 201
L5X example 180, 191
L5X limithigh structure 195
L5X limitlow structure 196
L5X preset structure 195
L5X sbrret structure 199
L5X step structure 193
L5X stop structure 199
L5X structure 189
L5X text box structure 178
L5X transition structure 197
leg attributes 201
LOGIC 191
online edits 191
sbrret attributes 199
SFCContent 191
step attributes 194
stop attributes 200
transition attributes 198
sheet
attributes 168
guidelines 168
L5K structure 167
L5X structure 166
step
attributes 194
L5K structure 193
L5X structure 193
stop
attributes 200
L5K structure 200
L5X structure 199
structured text
instructions 217
neutral text 217
structured text routine
attributes 214
component 213
295
Index
L5K example 215

L5K structure 213
L5X example 215
L5X structure 213
logic 214, 215
online edits 215
STContent 215
T
tag 263
alarm analog attributes 112
alarm digital attributes 114
attributes 109
component 105
consumed attributes 110
coordinate system attributes 127
guidelines 134
initial values 132
L5K alarm analog example 134
L5K alarm analog structure 111
L5K alarm digital example 134
L5K alarm digital structure 114
L5K axis structure 119
L5K coordinate system structure 127
L5K example 134
L5K initial values structure 132
L5K message structure 117
L5K motion group structure 129
L5K safety structure 131
L5K structure 106
L5X alarm analog example 134
L5X alarm analog structure 111
L5X alarm digital example 134
L5X alarm digital structure 114
L5X axis structure 119
L5X coordinate system structure 127
L5X example 134
L5X initial values structure 132
L5X message structure 117
L5X motion group structure 129
L5X safety structure 130
296
L5X structure 105

motion group attributes 129
produced attributes 110
record 263
tags 26, 28
task
attributes 236
component 235
guidelines 237
L5K example 237
L5K structure 235
L5X example 237
L5X structure 235
text box
attributes 179
guidelines 203
L5K structure 178
L5X structure 178
text boxes 26, 28
text file 21
TEXTBOX 263
TEXTBOX record 265
transition
attributes 198
L5K structure 197
L5X structure 197
trend
attributes 244
component 243
guidelines 248
L5K example 248
L5K pen structure 247
L5K structure 243
L5X example 248
L5X pen structure 247
L5X structure 243
pen attributes 248
TXT
ALMMSG 267
comment record 265
exporting 26
format 263
importing 28
TAG 263
TXT Unicode format 263
Index
examples 267
U
Unicode TXT format 263
W
watch list 251
watch tag 252
wire
attributes 178
guidelines 178
L5K structure 177
L5X structure 177
X
XML file 24
297
Rockwell Automation support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products. At
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support you can find technical and application notes, sample code, and links to software service packs. You
can also visit our Support Center at https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com for software updates, support chats and forums, technical
information, FAQs, and to sign up for product notification updates.
In addition, we offer multiple support programs for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting. For more information, contact your local
distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/online-phone.
Installation assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this manual. You can contact
Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada
1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada
Use the Worldwide Locator available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/locations, or contact your local Rockwell
Automation representative.
New product satisfaction return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility. However, if
your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to
your distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
Documentation feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the
feedback form, publication RA-DU002.

Supersedes Publication 1756-RM084T-EN-P - August 2015
Copyright 2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

1756 Rm084 en PImport Export

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1756 Rm084 en PImport Export

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1756 Rm084 en PImport Export

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Manual

Logix5000 Controllers Import/Export

Important user information

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

Added Equipment Sequence functionality.

Define an Equipment Sequence routine on page 221

Added the Primary Action Set controller security

L5X controller structure on page 51, L5K CONTROLLER structure on

Added the Permission Set controller attribute.

Controller attributes on page 54

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

Studio 5000 environment ..................................................................................... 19

Controller guidelines ............................................................................................. 56

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 107

L5K TAG structure ...................................................................................... 108

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

Tag initial values.................................................................................................... 132

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 141

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 151

L5K RUNG structure .................................................................................. 152

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 163

L5X Add-On Instruction structure .......................................................... 171

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 187

L5K sequential function chart SFC_ROUTINE structure ................ 187

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

Leg attributes .................................................................................................. 198

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 209

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 221

Step attributes ................................................................................................ 223

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 231

Examples ................................................................................................................. 233

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 235

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 239

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 247

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 251

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 257

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 259

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 269

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 271

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

Studio 5000 environment

The Studio 5000 Automation Engineering & Design Environment combines

The Studio 5000 environment is the foundation for the future of

The supported controllers list includes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,

Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell

Product Certifications webpage, available at

Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other

You can view or download publications at

DeviceNet is a trademark of OpenDeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA).

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-RM084U-EN-P - November 2015

Import and export files

Then use this format:

The entire controller project